Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
a933dad1 | 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 1992. |
5b87ad55 | 2 | |
95df8112 | 3 | Copyright (C) 1993-1995, 2001, 2006-2011 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
5b87ad55 GM |
4 | See the end of the file for license conditions. |
5 | ||
a933dad1 | 6 | |
9a21d88b KS |
7 | This file is about changes in emacs versions 19. |
8 | ||
9 | ||
a933dad1 | 10 | \f |
2eba3201 | 11 | * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
9a21d88b KS |
12 | |
13 | ||
2eba3201 GM |
14 | \f |
15 | * Changes in Emacs 19.33. | |
16 | ||
17 | ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major | |
18 | mode should do that--it is the user's choice.) | |
19 | ||
20 | ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to | |
21 | use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on. | |
22 | Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works. | |
9a21d88b KS |
23 | |
24 | ||
2eba3201 GM |
25 | \f |
26 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
27 | ||
28 | ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error. | |
29 | To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f. | |
30 | ||
31 | ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case | |
32 | conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it | |
33 | matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the | |
34 | expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional | |
35 | word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is | |
36 | all caps. | |
37 | ||
38 | ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame | |
39 | at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame. | |
40 | ||
41 | When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2 | |
42 | does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same | |
43 | as in previous Emacs versions. | |
44 | ||
45 | ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a | |
46 | non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any | |
47 | time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple | |
48 | frames. | |
49 | ||
50 | ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value | |
51 | if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu. | |
52 | This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the | |
53 | Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by | |
54 | accident. | |
55 | ||
56 | ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined | |
57 | keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region. | |
58 | It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that | |
59 | line and then executing the macro. | |
60 | ||
61 | This command is not new, but was never documented before. | |
62 | ||
63 | ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant | |
64 | (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter | |
65 | characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting | |
66 | characters. | |
67 | ||
68 | ** Font Lock mode | |
69 | ||
70 | *** Font Lock support modes | |
71 | ||
72 | Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see | |
73 | below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the | |
74 | hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode | |
75 | to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when | |
76 | Font Lock mode is enabled. | |
77 | ||
78 | For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put: | |
79 | ||
80 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode) | |
81 | ||
82 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
83 | ||
84 | *** lazy-lock | |
85 | ||
86 | The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur | |
87 | only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer | |
88 | becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and | |
89 | Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events | |
90 | occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the | |
91 | buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until | |
92 | Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time. | |
93 | ||
94 | To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs: | |
95 | ||
96 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | |
97 | ||
dfd67a62 | 98 | To control the package behavior, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'. |
2eba3201 GM |
99 | |
100 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
101 | ||
102 | *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or | |
103 | paren and key. | |
104 | ||
105 | *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now | |
106 | supported. | |
107 | ||
108 | ** Gnus changes. | |
109 | ||
110 | Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new | |
111 | commands and variables have been added. There should be no | |
112 | significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the | |
113 | previously released version, except in the message composition area. | |
114 | ||
115 | Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes | |
116 | between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive. | |
117 | ||
118 | *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization | |
119 | variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now | |
120 | obsolete. | |
121 | ||
122 | *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where | |
123 | missing articles are represented by empty nodes. | |
124 | ||
125 | (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some) | |
126 | ||
127 | *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server. | |
128 | ||
129 | To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil) | |
130 | ||
131 | *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are | |
132 | referred. | |
133 | ||
134 | *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions: | |
135 | ||
136 | (setq gnus-use-grouplens t) | |
137 | ||
138 | *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed. | |
139 | ||
140 | (setq gnus-use-trees t) | |
141 | ||
142 | *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary | |
143 | buffers. | |
144 | ||
145 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode) | |
146 | ||
147 | *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode: | |
148 | ||
149 | `M-x gnus-binary-mode' | |
150 | ||
151 | *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy. | |
152 | ||
153 | (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode) | |
154 | ||
155 | *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail. | |
156 | ||
157 | Use the `S D r' and `S D b'. | |
158 | ||
159 | *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency | |
160 | is possible. | |
161 | ||
162 | (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group) | |
163 | ||
164 | *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on | |
165 | groups of groups. | |
166 | ||
167 | *** Caching is possible in virtual groups. | |
168 | ||
169 | *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news | |
170 | batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else. | |
171 | ||
172 | *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets. | |
173 | ||
174 | *** The Gnus cache is much faster. | |
175 | ||
176 | *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria. | |
177 | ||
178 | For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank) | |
179 | ||
180 | *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and | |
181 | expiration times. | |
182 | ||
183 | *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used. | |
184 | ||
185 | *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on | |
186 | process marked articles on the `M P' submap. | |
187 | ||
188 | *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available | |
189 | articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been | |
190 | bound to keys on the `/' submap. | |
191 | ||
192 | *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving | |
193 | articles with the `*' command. | |
194 | ||
195 | *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles. | |
196 | ||
197 | *** Article headers can be buttonized. | |
198 | ||
199 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head) | |
200 | ||
201 | *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID. | |
202 | ||
203 | *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the | |
204 | `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable. | |
205 | ||
206 | *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article | |
207 | buffer. | |
208 | ||
209 | *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'. | |
210 | ||
211 | *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process. | |
212 | ||
213 | *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam. | |
214 | ||
215 | (setq gnus-use-nocem t) | |
216 | ||
217 | *** Groups can be made permanently visible. | |
218 | ||
219 | (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:") | |
220 | ||
221 | *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier. | |
222 | ||
223 | *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header. | |
224 | ||
225 | *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header. | |
226 | ||
227 | (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function | |
228 | 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references) | |
229 | ||
230 | *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid | |
231 | refetching. | |
232 | ||
233 | (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50) | |
234 | ||
235 | *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate | |
236 | buffer to allow easier treatment. | |
237 | ||
238 | *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'. | |
239 | ||
240 | *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving. | |
241 | ||
242 | (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t) | |
243 | ||
244 | *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching | |
245 | articles. | |
246 | ||
247 | (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view) | |
248 | ||
249 | *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text. | |
250 | ||
251 | *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much | |
252 | cited text to hide is now customizable. | |
253 | ||
254 | (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2) | |
255 | ||
256 | *** Boring headers can be hidden. | |
257 | ||
258 | (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers) | |
259 | ||
260 | *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar. | |
261 | ||
262 | *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added. | |
263 | ||
264 | The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features | |
265 | in greater detail. | |
9a21d88b | 266 | |
2eba3201 GM |
267 | \f |
268 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32 | |
269 | ||
270 | ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional | |
271 | second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not | |
272 | asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already | |
273 | exists. | |
274 | ||
275 | ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors, | |
276 | as well as lists. | |
277 | ||
278 | ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap | |
279 | of a given keymap. | |
280 | ||
281 | ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a | |
282 | given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a | |
283 | keymap or nil. | |
284 | ||
285 | ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really | |
286 | an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real" | |
287 | name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil | |
288 | menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for | |
289 | equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the | |
290 | alias. | |
9a21d88b KS |
291 | |
292 | ||
2eba3201 GM |
293 | \f |
294 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31 | |
295 | ||
296 | ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States. | |
297 | ||
298 | Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act. | |
299 | This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law | |
300 | was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans | |
301 | far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any | |
302 | pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited. | |
303 | ||
304 | For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what | |
305 | you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site | |
306 | `http://www.vtw.org/'. | |
307 | ||
308 | ** A note about C mode indentation customization. | |
309 | ||
310 | The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style | |
311 | do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode. | |
312 | It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are | |
313 | much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs | |
314 | chapter of the manual for details. | |
315 | ||
316 | However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old | |
317 | customization variables take effect. | |
318 | ||
319 | ** Marking with the mouse. | |
320 | ||
321 | When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains | |
322 | highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are | |
323 | using M-x transient-mark-mode. | |
324 | ||
325 | ** Improved Windows NT/95 support. | |
326 | ||
327 | *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95. | |
328 | ||
329 | *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used | |
330 | to work on NT only and not on 95.) | |
331 | ||
332 | *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems | |
333 | in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as | |
334 | you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS | |
335 | application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS | |
336 | applications, these problems are significant. | |
337 | ||
338 | If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is | |
339 | likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy. | |
340 | However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess | |
341 | will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any | |
342 | other DOS application as a subprocess. | |
343 | ||
344 | Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess. | |
345 | You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess. | |
346 | ||
347 | If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate | |
348 | subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably | |
349 | have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy. | |
350 | Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two | |
351 | separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing | |
352 | Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes. | |
353 | ||
354 | ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode. | |
355 | ||
356 | This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in | |
357 | which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the | |
358 | minibuffer contains. | |
359 | ||
360 | ** `title' frame parameter and resource. | |
361 | ||
362 | The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else. | |
363 | It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources. | |
364 | It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise | |
365 | affects just the displayed title of the frame. | |
366 | ||
367 | The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do: | |
368 | it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources, | |
369 | and also serves as the default for the displayed title | |
370 | when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil. | |
371 | ||
372 | ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new | |
373 | enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer). | |
374 | ||
375 | ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the | |
376 | F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual | |
377 | Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif. | |
378 | ||
379 | If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif | |
380 | menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add | |
381 | something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds | |
382 | the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12: | |
383 | ||
384 | Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12 | |
385 | ||
386 | ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases | |
387 | to replace the characters it "deletes". | |
388 | ||
389 | ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message. | |
390 | ||
391 | ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts | |
392 | a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it, | |
393 | select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command. | |
394 | It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message | |
395 | immediately after the selected one. | |
396 | ||
397 | This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly | |
398 | made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs. | |
399 | ||
400 | ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory. | |
401 | ||
402 | Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home | |
403 | directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover. | |
404 | If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If | |
405 | Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x | |
406 | recover-session. | |
407 | ||
408 | You can turn off the writing of these files by setting | |
409 | auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session | |
410 | will not work. | |
411 | ||
412 | Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on | |
413 | normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off | |
414 | this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this | |
415 | bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so | |
416 | now that the bug is fixed. | |
417 | ||
418 | ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
419 | ||
420 | There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do | |
421 | when you visit a link to a file that is under version control. | |
422 | Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system, | |
423 | which is dangerous and probably not what you want. | |
424 | ||
425 | If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file, | |
426 | telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default), | |
427 | VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil, | |
428 | the link is visited and a warning displayed. | |
429 | ||
430 | ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language. | |
431 | Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which | |
432 | is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters). | |
433 | ||
434 | There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and | |
435 | Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they | |
436 | enable only the accent characters needed for particular language. | |
437 | The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language, | |
438 | remain normal. | |
439 | ||
440 | ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various | |
441 | header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...). | |
442 | ||
443 | Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups | |
444 | known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header | |
445 | offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since | |
446 | Followup-To usually just holds one of those. | |
447 | ||
448 | Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list | |
449 | of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides | |
450 | a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user | |
451 | name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the | |
452 | documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and | |
453 | `mail-directory-stream'.) | |
454 | ||
455 | ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured) | |
456 | skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named | |
457 | characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible | |
458 | with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s. | |
459 | ||
460 | Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and | |
461 | - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be | |
462 | wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results). | |
463 | ||
464 | The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or | |
465 | less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for | |
466 | headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit / | |
467 | Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable. | |
468 | Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to | |
469 | fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due | |
470 | to a limitation in font-lock). | |
471 | ||
472 | External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving. | |
473 | ||
474 | ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current | |
475 | buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all | |
476 | buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in | |
477 | this example: | |
478 | ||
479 | (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook | |
480 | '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index"))) | |
481 | ||
482 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
483 | ||
484 | *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores. | |
485 | ||
486 | *** Font Lock mode is now supported. | |
487 | ||
488 | *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive. | |
489 | ||
490 | *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new | |
491 | entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting | |
492 | will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or | |
493 | isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c | |
494 | (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it. | |
495 | The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil. | |
496 | ||
497 | *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q | |
498 | does the same job. | |
499 | ||
500 | *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author = | |
501 | "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported. | |
502 | ||
503 | *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help | |
504 | text. | |
505 | ||
506 | ** Font Lock mode | |
507 | ||
508 | *** Global Font Lock mode | |
509 | ||
510 | Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the | |
511 | new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable | |
512 | font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically | |
513 | turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned | |
514 | on globally where the buffer mode supports it. | |
515 | ||
516 | For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put: | |
517 | ||
518 | (global-font-lock-mode t) | |
519 | ||
520 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
521 | ||
522 | *** Local Refontification | |
523 | ||
524 | In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only. | |
525 | However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines, | |
526 | those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new | |
527 | command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block). | |
528 | ||
529 | In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function. | |
530 | (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the | |
531 | current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines | |
532 | above and below point. | |
533 | ||
534 | With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point. | |
535 | ||
536 | ** Follow mode | |
537 | ||
538 | Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same | |
539 | buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two | |
540 | side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if | |
541 | they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window, | |
542 | split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x | |
543 | follow-mode. | |
544 | ||
545 | M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled. | |
546 | ||
547 | To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the | |
548 | command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split. | |
549 | ||
550 | ** hide-show changes. | |
551 | ||
552 | The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed | |
553 | to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for | |
554 | normal hooks. | |
555 | ||
556 | ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands. | |
557 | The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q. | |
558 | ||
559 | ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are | |
b72333b2 | 560 | recognized by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are |
2eba3201 GM |
561 | those that begin a function, record, or macro. |
562 | ||
563 | ** MSDOS Changes | |
564 | ||
565 | *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP. | |
566 | Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works. | |
567 | ||
568 | *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten | |
569 | and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs. | |
570 | ||
571 | *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak. | |
572 | ||
573 | *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously | |
574 | pressing both mouse buttons. | |
575 | ||
576 | *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had | |
577 | restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones | |
578 | are: | |
579 | ||
580 | **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package) | |
581 | now works. | |
582 | ||
583 | **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode). | |
584 | ||
585 | **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new | |
586 | implementation of Emacs timers, see below). | |
587 | ||
588 | **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards. | |
589 | ||
590 | **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms. | |
591 | ||
592 | **** `M-x recover-session' works. | |
593 | ||
594 | **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors. | |
595 | ||
596 | **** The `TPU-EDT' package works. | |
9a21d88b | 597 | |
2eba3201 GM |
598 | \f |
599 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31. | |
600 | ||
601 | ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95 | |
602 | tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a | |
603 | remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in | |
604 | this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this | |
605 | behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it. | |
606 | ||
607 | ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values. | |
608 | ||
609 | The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux', | |
610 | not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type' | |
611 | need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also | |
612 | be different. | |
613 | ||
614 | It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather | |
615 | than `system-type'. | |
616 | ||
617 | See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this. | |
618 | ||
619 | ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process | |
620 | now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them. | |
621 | ||
622 | ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers | |
623 | that pointed into or next to the deleted text. | |
624 | ||
625 | ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and | |
626 | no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more | |
627 | reliably and can be used for shorter time delays. | |
628 | ||
629 | The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer | |
630 | to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks | |
631 | like this: | |
632 | ||
633 | (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
634 | ||
635 | SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens. | |
636 | It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer | |
637 | becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS. | |
638 | ||
639 | REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in | |
640 | seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0 | |
641 | means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once. | |
642 | ||
643 | *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give | |
644 | up if too much time passes. | |
645 | ||
646 | (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...) | |
647 | ||
648 | This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds. | |
649 | If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value | |
650 | of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last | |
651 | form in BODY. | |
652 | ||
653 | *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for | |
654 | a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A | |
655 | call looks like this: | |
656 | ||
657 | (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
658 | ||
659 | SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer | |
660 | runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the | |
661 | timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments | |
662 | ARGS. | |
663 | ||
664 | Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse | |
665 | command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse | |
666 | command. | |
667 | ||
668 | REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each | |
669 | time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer | |
670 | does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after | |
671 | each time Emacs becomes idle. | |
672 | ||
673 | If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is | |
674 | idle for SECS seconds. | |
675 | ||
676 | *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at | |
677 | all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your | |
678 | programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers | |
679 | instead. | |
680 | ||
681 | *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if | |
682 | there is no answer within a certain time. | |
683 | ||
684 | (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE) | |
685 | ||
686 | asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers | |
687 | within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave. | |
688 | Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE. | |
689 | ||
690 | ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven | |
691 | arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual | |
692 | meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the | |
693 | arguments in between are ignored. | |
694 | ||
695 | This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as | |
696 | the list of arguments for `encode-time'. | |
697 | ||
698 | ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory | |
699 | /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to | |
700 | /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for | |
701 | site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs | |
702 | version. | |
703 | ||
704 | It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs | |
705 | version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating | |
706 | for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that | |
707 | has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself | |
708 | and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the | |
709 | problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve. | |
710 | ||
711 | ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or | |
712 | .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating | |
713 | systems with limited file name syntax. | |
714 | ||
715 | Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function | |
716 | convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form | |
717 | for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file | |
718 | completions.el: | |
719 | ||
720 | (defvar save-completions-file-name | |
721 | (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions") | |
722 | "*The filename to save completions to.") | |
723 | ||
724 | This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that | |
725 | depends on the operating system, because the definition of | |
726 | convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On | |
727 | Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On | |
728 | MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system. | |
729 | ||
730 | ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument | |
731 | rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the | |
732 | minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.) | |
733 | ||
734 | ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process | |
735 | marker from its buffer position. | |
736 | ||
737 | ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether | |
738 | Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection. | |
739 | The default is nil, meaning there are no messages. | |
740 | ||
741 | ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors | |
742 | that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error | |
743 | condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any | |
744 | of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions | |
745 | matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger, | |
746 | regardless of the value of debug-on-error. | |
747 | ||
748 | This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting | |
749 | errors that happen often during editing. | |
750 | ||
751 | ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum | |
752 | into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case | |
753 | puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened. | |
754 | ||
755 | ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window | |
756 | now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window. | |
757 | ||
758 | ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying | |
759 | a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer | |
760 | name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames | |
761 | to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc., | |
762 | and not get-buffer-window. | |
763 | ||
764 | ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions, | |
765 | calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer | |
766 | being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them. | |
767 | ||
768 | If you use this feature, you should set the variable | |
769 | buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a | |
770 | property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a | |
771 | non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions | |
772 | are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil | |
773 | property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called | |
774 | over and over for the same text. | |
775 | ||
776 | ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el | |
777 | ||
778 | *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written | |
779 | in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command: | |
780 | ||
781 | ;; @(#) HEADER: text | |
782 | ;; $HEADER: text $ | |
783 | ||
784 | in addition to the normal | |
785 | ||
786 | ;; HEADER: text | |
787 | ||
788 | *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify | |
789 | checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and | |
790 | lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information. | |
791 | ||
792 | ||
793 | \f | |
a933dad1 DL |
794 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.30. |
795 | ||
796 | ** Be sure to recompile your byte-compiled Emacs Lisp files | |
797 | if you last compiled them with Emacs 19.28 or earlier. | |
798 | You can use M-x byte-force-recompile to recompile all the .elc files | |
799 | in a specified directory. | |
800 | ||
801 | ** Emacs now provides multiple-frame support on Windows NT | |
802 | and Windows 95. | |
803 | ||
804 | ** M-x column-number-mode toggles a minor mode which displays | |
805 | the current column number in the mode line. | |
806 | ||
807 | ** Line Number mode is now enabled by default. | |
808 | ||
809 | ** M-x what-line now displays the line number in the accessible | |
810 | portion of the buffer as well as the line number in the full buffer, | |
811 | when narrowing is in effect. | |
812 | ||
813 | ** If you type a M-x command that has an equivalent key binding, | |
814 | the equivalent is shown in the minibuffer before the command executes. | |
815 | This feature is enabled by default for the sake of beginning users. | |
816 | You can turn the feature off by setting suggest-key-bindings to nil. | |
817 | ||
818 | ** The menu bar is now visible on text-only terminals. To choose a | |
819 | command from the menu bar when you have no mouse, type M-` | |
820 | (Meta-Backquote) or F10. To turn off menu bar display, | |
821 | do (menu-bar-mode -1). | |
822 | ||
823 | ** Whenever you invoke a minibuffer, it appears in the minibuffer | |
824 | window that the current frame uses. | |
825 | ||
826 | Emacs can only use one minibuffer window at a time. If you activate | |
827 | the minibuffer while a minibuffer window is active in some other | |
828 | frame, the outer minibuffer window disappears while the inner one is | |
829 | active. | |
830 | ||
831 | ** Echo area messages always appear in the minibuffer window that the | |
832 | current frame uses. If a minibuffer is active in some other frame, | |
833 | the echo area message does not hide it even temporarily. | |
834 | ||
835 | ** The minibuffer now has a menu-bar menu. You can use it to exit or | |
836 | abort the minibuffer, or to ask for completion. | |
837 | ||
838 | ** Dead-key and composite character processing is done in the standard | |
839 | X11R6 manner (through the default "input method" using the | |
840 | /usr/lib/X11/locale/*/Compose databases of key combinations). I.e. if | |
841 | it works in xterm, it should also work in emacs now. | |
842 | ||
843 | ** Mouse changes | |
844 | ||
845 | *** You can now use the mouse when running Emacs in an xterm. | |
846 | Use M-x xterm-mouse-mode to let emacs take control over the mouse. | |
847 | ||
848 | *** C-mouse-1 now once again provides a menu of buffers to select. | |
849 | S-mouse-1 is now the way to select a default font for the frame. | |
850 | ||
851 | *** There is a new mouse-scroll-min-lines variable to control the | |
852 | minimum number of lines scrolled by dragging the mouse outside a | |
853 | window's edge. | |
854 | ||
855 | *** Dragging mouse-1 on a vertical line that separates windows | |
856 | now moves the line, thus changing the widths of the two windows. | |
857 | (This feature is available only if you don't have vertical scroll bars. | |
858 | If you do use them, a scroll bar separates two side-by-side windows.) | |
859 | ||
860 | *** Double-click mouse-1 on a character with "symbol" syntax (such as | |
861 | underscore, in C mode) selects the entire symbol surrounding that | |
862 | character. (Double-click mouse-1 on a letter selects a whole word.) | |
863 | ||
864 | ** When incremental search wraps around to the beginning (or end) of | |
865 | the buffer, if you keep on searching until you go past the original | |
866 | starting point of the search, the echo area changes from "Wrapped" to | |
867 | "Overwrapped". That tells you that you are revisiting matches that | |
868 | you have already seen. | |
869 | ||
870 | ** Filling changes. | |
871 | ||
872 | *** If the variable colon-double-space is non-nil, the explicit fill | |
873 | commands put two spaces after a colon. | |
874 | ||
875 | *** Auto-Fill mode now supports Adaptive Fill mode just as the | |
876 | explicit fill commands do. The variable adaptive-fill-regexp | |
877 | specifies a regular expression to match text at the beginning of | |
878 | a line that should be the fill prefix. | |
879 | ||
880 | *** Adaptive Fill mode can take a fill prefix from the first line of a | |
881 | paragraph, *provided* that line is not a paragraph-starter line. | |
882 | ||
883 | Paragraph-starter lines are indented lines that start a new | |
884 | paragraph because they are indented. This indentation shouldn't | |
885 | be copied to additional lines. | |
886 | ||
887 | Whether indented lines are paragraph lines depends on the value of the | |
888 | variable paragraph-start. Some major modes set this; you can set it | |
889 | by hand or in mode hooks as well. For editing text in which paragraph | |
890 | first lines are not indented, and which contains paragraphs in which | |
891 | all lines are indented, you should use Indented Text mode or arrange | |
892 | for paragraph-start not to match these lines. | |
893 | ||
894 | *** You can specify more complex ways of choosing a fill prefix | |
895 | automatically by setting `adaptive-fill-function'. This function | |
896 | is called with point after the left margin of a line, and it should | |
897 | return the appropriate fill prefix based on that line. | |
898 | If it returns nil, that means it sees no fill prefix in that line. | |
899 | ||
900 | ** Gnus changes. | |
901 | ||
902 | Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has been rewritten and expanded. Most | |
903 | things that worked with the old version should still work with the new | |
904 | version. Code that relies heavily on Gnus internals is likely to | |
905 | fail, though. | |
906 | ||
907 | *** Incompatibilities with the old GNUS. | |
908 | ||
909 | **** All interactive commands have kept their names, but many internal | |
910 | functions have changed names. | |
911 | ||
912 | **** The summary mode gnus-uu commands have been moved from the `C-c | |
913 | C-v' keymap to the `X' keymap. | |
914 | ||
915 | **** There can now be several summary buffers active at once. | |
916 | Variables that are relevant to each summary buffer are buffer-local to | |
917 | that buffer. | |
918 | ||
919 | **** Old hilit code doesn't work at all. Gnus performs its own | |
920 | highlighting based not only on what's visible in the buffer, but on | |
921 | other data structures. | |
922 | ||
177c0ea7 | 923 | **** Old packages like `expire-kill' will no longer work. |
a933dad1 DL |
924 | |
925 | **** `C-c C-l' in the group buffer no longer switches to a different | |
926 | buffer, but instead lists killed groups in the group buffer. | |
927 | ||
928 | *** New features. | |
929 | ||
930 | **** The look of all buffers can be changed by setting format-like | |
931 | variables. | |
177c0ea7 | 932 | |
a933dad1 DL |
933 | **** Local spool and several NNTP servers can be used at once. |
934 | ||
935 | **** Groups can be combined into virtual groups. | |
936 | ||
937 | **** Different mail formats can be read much the same way as one would | |
938 | read newsgroups. All the mail backends implement mail expiry schemes. | |
939 | ||
940 | **** Gnus can use various strategies for gathering threads that have | |
941 | lost their roots (thereby gathering loose sub-threads into one thread) | |
942 | or it can go back and retrieve enough headers to build a complete | |
943 | thread. | |
944 | ||
945 | **** Killed groups can be read. | |
946 | ||
947 | **** Gnus can do partial group updates - you do not have to retrieve | |
948 | the entire active file just to check for new articles in a few groups. | |
949 | ||
950 | **** Gnus implements a sliding scale of subscribedness to groups. | |
951 | ||
952 | **** You can score articles according to any number of criteria. You | |
953 | can get Gnus to score articles for you using adaptive scoring. | |
954 | ||
955 | **** Gnus maintains a dribble buffer that is auto-saved the normal | |
956 | Emacs manner, so it should be difficult to lose much data on what you | |
957 | have read if your machine should go down. | |
958 | ||
959 | **** Gnus now has its own startup file (`.gnus.el') to avoid | |
960 | cluttering up the `.emacs' file. | |
961 | ||
962 | **** You can set the process mark on both groups and articles and | |
963 | perform operations on all the marked items. | |
964 | ||
965 | **** You can grep through a subset of groups and create a group from | |
966 | the results. | |
967 | ||
968 | **** You can list subsets of groups using matches on group names or | |
969 | group descriptions. | |
970 | ||
971 | **** You can browse foreign servers and subscribe to groups from those | |
972 | servers. | |
973 | ||
974 | **** Gnus can pre-fetch articles asynchronously on a second connection | |
975 | to the servers. | |
976 | ||
977 | **** You can cache articles locally. | |
978 | ||
979 | **** Gnus can fetch FAQs to and descriptions of groups. | |
980 | ||
981 | **** Digests (and other files) can be used as the basis for groups. | |
982 | ||
983 | **** Articles can be highlighted and customized. | |
984 | ||
985 | ** Changes to Version Control (VC) | |
986 | ||
987 | *** General changes (all backends). | |
988 | ||
989 | VC directory listings (C-x v d) are now kept up to date when you do a | |
990 | vc-next-action (C-x v v) on the marked files. The `g' command updates | |
991 | the buffer properly. `=' in a VC dired buffer produces a version | |
992 | control diff, not an ordinary diff. | |
993 | ||
994 | *** CVS changes. | |
995 | ||
996 | Under CVS, you no longer need to type C-x C-q before you can edit a | |
997 | file. VC doesn't write-protect unmodified buffers anymore; you can | |
998 | freely change them at any time. The mode line keeps track of the | |
999 | file status. | |
1000 | ||
1001 | If you do want unmodified files to be write-protected, set your | |
1002 | CVSREAD environment variable. VC sees this and behaves accordingly; | |
dfd67a62 | 1003 | that will give you the behavior of Emacs 19.29, similar to that under |
a933dad1 DL |
1004 | RCS and SCCS. In this mode, if the variable vc-mistrust-permissions |
1005 | is nil, VC learns the modification state from the file permissions. | |
1006 | When setting CVSREAD for the first time, you should check out the | |
1007 | whole module anew, so that the file permissions are set correctly. | |
1008 | ||
1009 | VC also works with remote repositories now. When you visit a file, it | |
1010 | doesn't run "cvs status" anymore, so there shouldn't be any long delays. | |
1011 | ||
1012 | Directory listings under VC/CVS have been enhanced. Type C-x v d, and | |
1013 | you get a list of all files in or below the current directory that are | |
1014 | not up-to-date. The actual status (modified, merge, conflict, ...) is | |
1015 | displayed for each file. If you give a prefix argument (C-u C-x v d), | |
1016 | up-to-date files are also listed. You can mark any number of files, | |
1017 | and execute the next logical version control command on them (C-x v v). | |
1018 | ||
1019 | *** Starting a new branch. | |
1020 | ||
177c0ea7 | 1021 | If you try to lock a version that is not the latest on its branch, |
a933dad1 DL |
1022 | VC asks for confirmation in the minibuffer. If you say no, it offers |
1023 | to lock the latest version instead. | |
1024 | ||
1025 | *** RCS non-strict locking. | |
1026 | ||
1027 | VC can now handle RCS non-strict locking, too. In this mode, working | |
1028 | files are always writable and you needn't lock the file before making | |
1029 | changes, similar to the default mode under CVS. To enable non-strict | |
1030 | locking for a file, use the "rcs -U" command. | |
1031 | ||
1032 | *** Sharing RCS master files. | |
1033 | ||
1034 | If you share RCS subdirs with other users (through symbolic links), | |
1035 | and you always want to work on the latest version, set | |
1036 | vc-consult-headers to nil and vc-mistrust-permissions to `t'. | |
1037 | Then you see the state of the *latest* version on the mode line, not | |
1038 | that of your working file. When you do a check out, VC overwrites | |
1039 | your working file with the latest version from the master. | |
1040 | ||
1041 | *** RCS customization. | |
1042 | ||
1043 | There is a new variable vc-consult-headers. If it is t (the default), | |
9a21d88b | 1044 | VC searches for RCS headers in working files (like `$Id$') and |
a933dad1 DL |
1045 | determines the state of the file from them, not from the master file. |
1046 | This is fast and more reliable when you use branches. (The variable | |
1047 | was already present in Emacs 19.29, but didn't get mentioned in the | |
1048 | NEWS.) | |
1049 | ||
1050 | ** Calendar changes. | |
1051 | ||
1052 | *** New calendars supported: Chinese, Coptic, Ethiopic | |
1053 | ||
1054 | Here are the commands for converting to and from these calendars: | |
1055 | ||
1056 | gC: calendar-goto-chinese-date | |
1057 | gk: calendar-goto-coptic-date | |
1058 | ge: calendar-goto-ethiopic-date | |
1059 | ||
1060 | pC: calendar-print-chinese-date | |
1061 | pk: calendar-print-coptic-date | |
1062 | pe: calendar-print-ethiopic-date | |
1063 | ||
1064 | *** Printed calendars | |
1065 | ||
1066 | Calendar mode now has commands to produce fancy printed calendars via | |
1067 | LaTeX. You can ask for a calendar for one or more days, weeks, months | |
1068 | or years. The commands all start with `t'; see the manual for a list | |
1069 | of them. | |
1070 | ||
1071 | *** New sexp diary entry type | |
1072 | ||
177c0ea7 | 1073 | Reminders that apply in the days leading up to an event. |
a933dad1 DL |
1074 | |
1075 | ** The CC-mode package now provides the default C and C++ modes. | |
1076 | See the manual for documentation of its features. | |
1077 | ||
1078 | ** The uniquify package chooses buffer names differently when you | |
1079 | visit multiple files with the same name (in different directories). | |
1080 | ||
1081 | ** RMAIL now always uses the movemail program when it renames an | |
1082 | inbox file, so that it can interlock properly with the mailer | |
1083 | no matter where it is delivering mail. | |
1084 | ||
1085 | ** tex-start-of-header and tex-end-of-header are now regular expressions, | |
1086 | not strings. | |
1087 | ||
1088 | ** To enable automatic uncompression of compressed files, | |
1089 | type M-x auto-compression-mode. (This command used to be called | |
1090 | toggle-auto-compression, but was not documented before.) In Lisp, | |
1091 | you can do | |
1092 | ||
1093 | (auto-compression-mode 1) | |
1094 | ||
1095 | to turn the mode on. | |
1096 | ||
1097 | ** The new pc-select package emulates the key bindings for cutting and | |
1098 | pasting, and selection of regions, found in Windows, Motif, and the | |
1099 | Macintosh. | |
1100 | ||
1101 | ** Help buffers now use a special major mode, Help mode. This mode | |
1102 | normally turns on View mode; it also provides a hook, help-mode-hook, | |
1103 | which you can use for other customization. | |
1104 | ||
1105 | ** Apropos now uses faces for enhanced legibility. It now describes | |
1106 | symbol properties as well as their function definitions and variable | |
1107 | values. You can use Mouse-2 or RET to get more information about a | |
1108 | function definition, variable, or property. | |
1109 | ||
1110 | ** Font Lock mode | |
1111 | ||
1112 | *** Supports Scheme, TCL and Help modes | |
1113 | ||
1114 | For example, to automatically turn on Font Lock mode in the *Help* | |
1115 | buffer, put: | |
1116 | ||
1117 | (add-hook 'help-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
1118 | ||
1119 | in your ~/.emacs. | |
1120 | ||
1121 | *** Enhanced fontification | |
1122 | ||
1123 | The structure of font-lock-keywords is extended to allow "anchored" keywords. | |
1124 | Typically, a keyword item of font-lock-keywords comprises a regexp to search | |
1125 | for and information to specify how the regexp should be highlighted. However, | |
1126 | the highlighting information is extended so that it can be another keyword | |
1127 | item. This keyword item, its regexp and highlighting information, is processed | |
1128 | before resuming with the keyword item of which it is part. | |
1129 | ||
1130 | For example, a typical keyword item might be: | |
1131 | ||
1132 | ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face)) | |
1133 | ||
1134 | which fontifies each occurrence of the discrete word "anchor" in the value of | |
1135 | the variable anchor-face. However, the highlighting information can be used to | |
1136 | fontify text that is anchored to the word "anchor". For example: | |
1137 | ||
1138 | ("\\<anchor\\>" (0 anchor-face) ("\\=[ ,]*\\(item\\)" nil nil (1 item-face))) | |
1139 | ||
1140 | which fontifies each occurrence of "anchor" as above, but for each occurrence | |
1141 | of "anchor", each occurrence of "item", in any following comma separated list, | |
1142 | is fontified in the value of the variable item-face. Thus the "item" text is | |
1143 | anchored to the "anchor" text. See the variable documentation for further | |
1144 | information. | |
1145 | ||
1146 | This feature is used to extend the level and quality of fontification in a | |
1147 | number of modes. For example, C/C++ modes now have level 3 decoration that | |
1148 | includes the fontification of variable and function names in declaration lists. | |
1149 | In this instance, the "anchor" described in the above example is a type or | |
1150 | class name, and an "item" is a variable or function name. | |
1151 | ||
1152 | *** Fontification levels | |
1153 | ||
1154 | The variables font-lock-maximum-decoration and font-lock-maximum-size are | |
1155 | extended to specify levels and sizes for specific modes. The variable | |
1156 | font-lock-maximum-decoration specifies the preferred level of fontification for | |
1157 | modes that provide multiple levels (typically from "subdued" to "gaudy"). The | |
1158 | variable font-lock-maximum-size specifies the buffer size for which buffer | |
1159 | fontification is suppressed when Font Lock mode is turned on (typically because | |
1160 | it would take too long). | |
1161 | ||
1162 | These variables can now specify values for individual modes, by supplying | |
1163 | lists of mode names and values. For example, to use the above mentioned level | |
1164 | 3 decoration for buffers in C/C++ modes, and default decoration otherwise, put: | |
1165 | ||
1166 | (setq font-lock-maximum-decoration '((c-mode . 3) (c++-mode . 3))) | |
1167 | ||
1168 | in your ~/.emacs. Maximum buffer size values for individual modes are | |
1169 | specified in the same way with the variable font-lock-maximum-size. | |
1170 | ||
1171 | *** Font Lock configuration | |
1172 | ||
1173 | The mechanism to provide default settings for Font Lock mode are the variables | |
1174 | font-lock-defaults and font-lock-maximum-decoration. Typically, you should | |
1175 | only need to change the value of font-lock-maximum-decoration. However, to | |
1176 | support Font Lock mode for buffers in modes that currently do not support Font | |
1177 | Lock mode, you should set a buffer local value of font-lock-defaults for that | |
1178 | mode, typically via its mode hook. | |
1179 | ||
1180 | These variables are used by Font Lock mode to set the values of the variables | |
1181 | font-lock-keywords, font-lock-keywords-only, font-lock-syntax-table, | |
1182 | font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function and font-lock-keywords-case-fold-search. | |
1183 | ||
1184 | You need not set these variables directly, and should not set them yourself | |
1185 | since the underlining mechanism may change in future. | |
1186 | ||
1187 | ** Archive mode is now the default mode for various sorts of | |
1188 | archive files (files whose names end with .arc, .lzh, .zip, and .zoo). | |
1189 | ||
1190 | ** You can automatically update the years in copyright notice by | |
1191 | means of (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'copyright-update). | |
1192 | Optionally it can update the GPL version as well. | |
1193 | ||
1194 | ** Scripts of various languages (Shell, AWK, Perl, makefiles ...) can | |
1195 | be automatically provided with a magic number and be made executable | |
1196 | by their respective modes under control of various user variables. | |
1197 | The mode must call (executable-set-magic "perl") or | |
1198 | (executable-set-magic "make" "-f"). The latter for example has no | |
1199 | effect on [Mm]akefile. | |
1200 | ||
1201 | ** Shell script mode now supports over 15 different shells. The new | |
1202 | command C-c ! executes the region, and optionally beginning of script | |
1203 | as well, by passing them to the shell. | |
1204 | ||
1205 | Cases such as `sh' being a `bash' are now accounted for. | |
1206 | Fontification now also does variables, the magic number and all | |
1207 | builtin commands. Shell script mode no longer mingles `tab-width' and | |
1208 | indentation style. The variable `sh-tab-width' has been renamed to | |
1209 | `sh-indentation'. Empty lines are now indented like previous | |
1210 | non-empty line, rather than just previous line. | |
1211 | ||
1212 | The annoying $ variable prompting has been eliminated. Instead, shell | |
1213 | script mode uses `comint-dynamic-completion' for commands, variables | |
1214 | and filenames. | |
1215 | ||
1216 | ** Two-column mode now automatically scrolls both buffers together, | |
1217 | which makes it possible to eliminate the special scrolling commands | |
1218 | that used to do so. | |
1219 | ||
1220 | The commands that operate in two-column mode are no longer bound to | |
1221 | keys outside that mode. f2 o will now position at the same point in | |
1222 | associated buffer. | |
1223 | ||
1224 | the new command f2 RET inserts a newline in both buffers, at point and | |
1225 | at the corresponding position in the associated buffer. | |
1226 | ||
1227 | ** Skeleton commands now work smoothly as abbrev definitions. The | |
1228 | element < no longer exists, ' is a new element. | |
1229 | ||
1230 | ** The autoinsert insert facility for prefilling empty files as soon | |
1231 | as they are found has been extended to accommodate skeletons or calling | |
1232 | functions. See the function auto-insert. | |
1233 | ||
1234 | ** TPU-edt Changes | |
1235 | ||
1236 | Loading tpu-edt no longer turns on tpu-edt mode. In fact, it is no | |
1237 | longer necessary to explicitly load tpu-edt. All you need to do to | |
1238 | turn on tpu-edt is run the tpu-edt function. Here's how to run | |
1239 | tpu-edt instead of loading the file: | |
177c0ea7 | 1240 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1241 | Running Emacs: Type emacs -f tpu-edt |
1242 | not emacs -l tpu-edt | |
1243 | ||
1244 | Within Emacs: Type M-x tpu-edt <ret> | |
1245 | not M-x load-library <ret> tpu-edt <ret> | |
177c0ea7 | 1246 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1247 | In .emacs: Use (tpu-edt) |
1248 | not (load "tpu-edt") | |
177c0ea7 | 1249 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1250 | The default name of the tpu-edt X key definition file has changed from |
1251 | ~/.tpu-gnu-keys to ~/.tpu-keys. If you don't rename the file yourself, | |
1252 | tpu-edt will offer to rename it the first time you invoke it under | |
1253 | x-windows. | |
1254 | ||
1255 | ** MS-DOS Enhancements: | |
1256 | ||
1257 | *** Better mouse control by adding the following functions [in dosfns.c] | |
1258 | msdos-mouse-enable, msdos-mouse-disable, msdos-mouse-init. | |
1259 | ||
1260 | *** If another foreground/background color than the default is setup in | |
1261 | your ~/_emacs, then the screen briefly flickers with the default | |
1262 | colors before changing to the colors you have specified. To avoid | |
1263 | this, the EMACSCOLORS environment variable exists. It shall be | |
1264 | defined as a string with the following elements: | |
177c0ea7 | 1265 | |
a933dad1 | 1266 | set EMACSCOLORS=fb;fb |
177c0ea7 | 1267 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1268 | The first set of "fb" defines the initial foreground and background |
1269 | colors using standard dos color numbers (0=black,.., 7=white). | |
1270 | If specified, the second set of "fb" defines the colors which are | |
1271 | restored when you leave emacs. | |
177c0ea7 | 1272 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1273 | *** The new SUSPEND environment variable can now be set as the shell to |
1274 | use when suspending emacs. This can be used to override the stupid | |
1275 | limitation on the environment of sub-shells in MS-DOS (they are just | |
1276 | large enough to hold the currently defined variables, not leaving | |
1277 | room for more); to overcome this limitation, add this to autoexec.bat: | |
177c0ea7 | 1278 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1279 | set SUSPEND=%COMSPEC% /E:2000 |
1280 | ||
1281 | ** The escape character can now be displayed on X frames. Try | |
1282 | this: | |
1283 | (aset standard-display-table 27 (vector 27)) | |
1284 | after first creating a display table (you can do that by loading | |
1285 | the disp-table library). | |
1286 | ||
1287 | ** The new command-line option --eval specifies an expression to evaluate | |
1288 | from the command line. | |
1289 | ||
b72333b2 | 1290 | ** etags has now the ability to tag Perl files. They are recognized |
a933dad1 DL |
1291 | either by the .pm and .pl suffixes or by a first line which starts |
1292 | with `#!' and specifies a Perl interpreter. The tagged lines are | |
1293 | those beginning with the `sub' keyword. | |
1294 | ||
b72333b2 | 1295 | New suffixes recognized are .hpp for C++; .f90 for Fortran; .bib, |
a933dad1 DL |
1296 | .ltx, .TeX for TeX (.bbl, .dtx removed); .ml for Lisp; .prolog for |
1297 | prolog (.pl is now Perl). | |
1298 | ||
1299 | ** The files etc/termcap.dat and etc/termcap.ucb have been replaced | |
1300 | with a new, merged, and much more comprehensive termcap file. The | |
1301 | new file should include all the special entries from the old one. | |
1302 | This new file is under active development as part of the ncurses | |
1303 | project. If you have any questions about this file, or problems with | |
1304 | an entry in it, email terminfo@ccil.org. | |
9a21d88b | 1305 | |
a933dad1 DL |
1306 | \f |
1307 | * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.30. | |
1308 | ||
1309 | ** New Data Types | |
1310 | ||
1311 | *** There is a new data type called a char-table which is an array | |
1312 | indexed by a character. Currently this is mostly equivalent to a | |
1313 | vector of length 256, but in the future, when a wider character set is | |
1314 | in use, it will be different. To create one, call | |
1315 | (make-char-table SUBTYPE INITIAL-VALUE) | |
1316 | ||
1317 | SUBTYPE is a symbol that identifies the specific use of this | |
1318 | character table. It can be any of these values: | |
1319 | ||
1320 | syntax-table | |
1321 | display-table | |
1322 | keyboard-translate-table | |
1323 | case-table | |
1324 | ||
1325 | The function `char-table-subtype' returns the subtype of a char-table. | |
1326 | You cannot alter the subtype of an existing char-table. | |
1327 | ||
1328 | A char-table has an element for each character code. It also has some | |
1329 | "extra slots". The number of extra slots depends on the subtype and | |
1330 | their use depends on the subtype. (Each subtype symbol has a | |
1331 | `char-table-extra-slots' property that says how many extra slots to | |
1332 | make.) Use (char-table-extra-slot TABLE N) to access extra slot N and | |
1333 | (set-char-table-extra-slot TABLE N VALUE) to store VALUE in slot N. | |
1334 | ||
1335 | A char-table T can have a parent, which should be another char-table | |
1336 | P. If you look for the value in T for character C, and the table T | |
1337 | actually holds nil, P's element for character C is used instead. | |
1338 | The functions `char-table-parent' and `set-char-table-parent' | |
1339 | let you read or set the parent of a char-table. | |
1340 | ||
1341 | To scan all the values in a char-table, do not try to loop through all | |
1342 | possible character codes. That would work for now, but will not work | |
1343 | in the future. Instead, call map-char-table. (map-char-table | |
1344 | FUNCTION TABLE) calls FUNCTION once for each character or character | |
1345 | set that has a distinct value in TABLE. FUNCTION gets two arguments, | |
1346 | RANGE and VALUE. RANGE specifies a range of TABLE that has one | |
1347 | uniform value, and VALUE is the value in TABLE for that range. | |
1348 | ||
1349 | Currently, RANGE is always a vector containing a single character | |
1350 | and it refers to that character alone. In the future, other kinds | |
1351 | of ranges will occur. You can set the value for a given range | |
1352 | with (set-char-table-range TABLE RANGE VALUE) and examine the value | |
1353 | for a range with (char-table-range TABLE RANGE). | |
1354 | ||
1355 | *** Syntax tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1356 | All syntax tables other than the standard syntax table | |
1357 | normally have the standard syntax table as their parent. | |
1358 | Their subtype is `syntax-table'. | |
1359 | ||
1360 | *** Display tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1361 | Their subtype is `display-table'. | |
1362 | ||
1363 | *** Case tables are now represented as char-tables. | |
1364 | Their subtype is `case-table'. | |
1365 | ||
1366 | *** The value of keyboard-translate-table may now be a char-table | |
1367 | instead of a string. Normally the char-tables used for this purpose | |
1368 | have the subtype `keyboard-translate-table', but that is not required. | |
1369 | ||
1370 | *** A new data type called a bool-vector is a vector of values | |
1371 | that are either t or nil. To create one, do | |
1372 | (make-bool-vector LENGTH INITIAL-VALUE) | |
1373 | ||
1374 | ** You can now specify, for each marker, how it should relocate when | |
1375 | text is inserted at the place where the marker points. This is called | |
1376 | the "insertion type" of the marker. | |
1377 | ||
1378 | To set the insertion type, do (set-marker-insertion-type MARKER TYPE). | |
1379 | If TYPE is t, it means the marker advances when text is inserted. If | |
1380 | TYPE is nil, it means the marker does not advance. (In Emacs 19.29, | |
1381 | markers did not advance.) | |
1382 | ||
1383 | The function marker-insertion-type reports the insertion type of a | |
1384 | given marker. The function copy-marker takes a second argument TYPE | |
1385 | which specifies the insertion type of the new copied marker. | |
1386 | ||
1387 | ** When you create an overlay, you can specify the insertion type of | |
1388 | the beginning and of the end. To do this, you can use two new | |
1389 | arguments to make-overlay: front-advance and rear-advance. | |
1390 | ||
1391 | ** The new function overlays-in returns a list of the overlays that | |
1392 | overlap a specified range of the buffer. The returned list includes | |
1393 | empty overlays at the beginning of this range, as well as within the | |
1394 | range. | |
1395 | ||
1396 | ** The new hook window-scroll-functions is run when a window has been | |
1397 | scrolled. The functions in this list are called just before | |
1398 | redisplay, after the new window-start has been computed. Each function | |
1399 | is called with two arguments--the window that has been scrolled, and its | |
1400 | new window-start position. | |
1401 | ||
1402 | This hook is useful for on-the-fly fontification and other features | |
1403 | that affect how the redisplayed text will look when it is displayed. | |
1404 | ||
1405 | The window-end value of the window is not valid when these functions | |
1406 | are called. The computation of window-end is byproduct of actual | |
1407 | redisplay of the window contents, which means it has not yet happened | |
1408 | when the hook is run. Computing window-end specially in advance for | |
1409 | the sake of these functions would cause a slowdown. | |
1410 | ||
1411 | The hook functions can determine where the text on the window will end | |
1412 | by calling vertical-motion starting with the window-start position. | |
1413 | ||
1414 | ** The new hook redisplay-end-trigger-functions is run whenever | |
1415 | redisplay in window uses text that extends past a specified end | |
1416 | trigger position. You set the end trigger position with the function | |
1417 | set-window-redisplay-end-trigger. The functions are called with two | |
1418 | arguments: the window, and the end trigger position. Storing nil for | |
1419 | the end trigger position turns off the feature, and the trigger value | |
1420 | is automatically reset to nil just after the hook is run. | |
1421 | ||
1422 | You can use the function window-redisplay-end-trigger to read a | |
1423 | window's current end trigger value. | |
1424 | ||
1425 | ** The new function insert-file-contents-literally inserts the | |
1426 | contents of a file without any character set translation or decoding. | |
1427 | ||
1428 | ** The new function safe-length computes the length of a list. | |
1429 | It never gets an error--it treats any non-list like nil. | |
1430 | If given a circular list, it returns an upper bound for the number | |
1431 | of elements before the circularity. | |
1432 | ||
1433 | ** replace-match now takes a fifth argument, SUBEXP. If SUBEXP is | |
1434 | non-nil, that says to replace just subexpression number SUBEXP of the | |
1435 | regexp that was matched, not the entire match. For example, after | |
1436 | matching `foo \(ba*r\)' calling replace-match with 1 as SUBEXP means | |
1437 | to replace just the text that matched `\(ba*r\)'. | |
1438 | ||
1439 | ** The new keymap special-event-map defines bindings for certain | |
1440 | events that should be handled at a very low level--as soon as they | |
1441 | are read. The read-event function processes these events itself, | |
1442 | and never returns them. | |
1443 | ||
1444 | Events that are handled in this way do not echo, they are never | |
1445 | grouped into key sequences, and they never appear in the value of | |
1446 | last-command-event or (this-command-keys). They do not discard a | |
1447 | numeric argument, they cannot be unread with unread-command-events, | |
1448 | they may not appear in a keyboard macro, and they are not recorded | |
1449 | in a keyboard macro while you are defining one. | |
1450 | ||
1451 | These events do, however, appear in last-input-event immediately after | |
1452 | they are read, and this is the way for the event's definition to find | |
1453 | the actual event. | |
1454 | ||
1455 | The events types iconify-frame, make-frame-visible and delete-frame | |
1456 | are normally handled in this way. | |
1457 | ||
1458 | ** encode-time now supports simple date arithmetic by means of | |
1459 | out-of-range values for its SEC, MINUTE, HOUR, DAY, and MONTH | |
1460 | arguments; for example, day 0 means the day preceding the given month. | |
1461 | Also, the ZONE argument can now be a TZ-style string. | |
1462 | ||
1463 | ** command-execute and call-interactively now accept an optional third | |
1464 | argument KEYS. If specified and non-nil, this specifies the key | |
1465 | sequence containing the events that were used to invoke the command. | |
1466 | ||
1467 | ** The environment variable NAME, if set, now specifies the value of | |
1468 | (user-full-name), when Emacs starts up. | |
9a21d88b KS |
1469 | |
1470 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
1471 | \f |
1472 | * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
1473 | ||
1474 | ** If you run out of memory. | |
1475 | ||
1476 | If you get the error message "Virtual memory exhausted", type C-x s. | |
1477 | That way of saving files has the least additional memory needs. Emacs | |
1478 | 19.29 keeps a reserve of memory which it makes available when this | |
1479 | error happens; that is to ensure that C-x s can complete its work. | |
1480 | ||
1481 | Once you have saved your data, you can exit and restart Emacs, or use | |
1482 | M-x kill-some-buffers to free up space. If you kill buffers | |
1483 | containing a substantial amount of text, you can go on editing. | |
1484 | ||
1485 | Do not use M-x buffer-menu to save or kill buffers when you are out of | |
1486 | memory, because that needs a fair amount memory itself and you may not | |
1487 | have enough to get it started. | |
1488 | ||
1489 | ** The format of compiled files has changed incompatibly. | |
1490 | ||
1491 | Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19.29 normally use a new format | |
1492 | that will not work in older Emacs versions. You can compile files | |
1493 | in the old format if you wish; see "Changes in compilation," below. | |
1494 | ||
1495 | ** Emacs 19.29 supports the DEC Alpha. | |
1496 | ||
1497 | ** Emacs runs on Windows NT. | |
1498 | ||
1499 | This port does not yet support windowing features. It works like a | |
1500 | text-only terminal, but it does support a mouse. | |
1501 | ||
1502 | In general, support for non-GNU-like operating systems is not a high | |
1503 | priority for the GNU project. We merged in the support for Windows NT | |
1504 | because that system is expected to be very widely used. | |
1505 | ||
1506 | ** Emacs supports Motif widgets. | |
1507 | ||
1508 | You can build Emacs with Motif widgets by specifying --with-x-toolkit=motif | |
1509 | when you run configure. | |
1510 | ||
1511 | Motif defines collections of windows called "tab groups", and uses the | |
1512 | tab key and the cursor keys to move between windows in a tab group. | |
1513 | Emacs naturally does not support this--it has other uses for the tab | |
1514 | key and cursor keys. Emacs does not support Motif accelerators either, | |
1515 | because it uses its normal keymap event binding features. | |
1516 | ||
1517 | We give higher priority to operation with a free widget set than to | |
1518 | operation with a proprietary one. | |
1519 | ||
1520 | ** If Emacs or the computer crashes, you can recover all the files you | |
1521 | were editing from their auto save files by typing M-x recover-session. | |
1522 | This first shows you a list of recorded interrupted sessions. Move | |
1523 | point to the one you choose, and type C-c C-c. | |
1524 | ||
1525 | Then recover-session asks about each of the files that were being | |
1526 | edited during that session, asking whether to recover that file. If | |
1527 | you answer y, it calls recover-file, which works in its normal | |
1528 | fashion. It shows the dates of the original file and its auto-save | |
1529 | file and asks once again whether to recover that file. | |
1530 | ||
1531 | When recover-session is done, the files you've chosen to recover | |
1532 | are present in Emacs buffers. You should then save them. | |
1533 | Only this--saving them--updates the files themselves. | |
1534 | ||
1535 | ** Menu bar menus now stay up if you click on the menu bar item and | |
1536 | release the mouse button within a certain amount of time. This is in | |
1537 | the X Toolkit version. | |
1538 | ||
1539 | ** The menu bar menus have been rearranged and split up to make for a | |
1540 | better organization. Two new menu bar menus, Tools and Search, | |
1541 | contain items that were formerly in the Files and Edit menus, as well | |
1542 | as some that did not exist in the menu bar menus before. | |
1543 | ||
1544 | ** Emacs can now display on more than one X display at the same time. | |
1545 | Use the command make-frame-on-display to create a frame, specifying | |
1546 | which display to use. | |
1547 | ||
1548 | ** M-x talk-connect sets up a multi-user talk connection | |
1549 | via Emacs. Specify the X display of the person you want to talk to. | |
1550 | You can talk to any number of people (within reason) by using | |
1551 | this command repeatedly to specify different people. | |
1552 | ||
1553 | Emacs does not make a fuss about security; the people who you talk to | |
1554 | can use all Emacs features, including visiting and editing files. If | |
1555 | this frightens you, don't use M-x talk-connect. | |
1556 | ||
1557 | ** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines. | |
1558 | This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1, | |
1559 | or 134,217,727. | |
1560 | ||
1561 | ** When you start Emacs, you can now specify option names in | |
1562 | long GNU form (starting with `--') and you can abbreviate the names. | |
1563 | ||
1564 | You can now specify the options in any order. | |
1565 | The previous requirements about the order of options | |
1566 | have been eliminated. | |
1567 | ||
1568 | The -L or --directory option lets you specify an additional | |
1569 | directory to search for Lisp libraries (including libraries | |
1570 | that you specify with the -l or --load options). | |
1571 | ||
1572 | ** Incremental search in Transient Mark mode, if the mark is already | |
1573 | active, now leaves the mark active and does not change its position. | |
1574 | You can make incremental search deactivate the mark once again with | |
1575 | this expression. | |
1576 | ||
1577 | (add-hook 'isearch-mode-hook 'deactivate-mark) | |
1578 | ||
1579 | ** C-delete now deletes a word backwards. This is for compatibility | |
1580 | with some editors in the PC world. (This key is not available on | |
1581 | ordinary ASCII terminals, because C-delete is not a distinct character | |
1582 | on those terminals.) | |
1583 | ||
1584 | ** ESC ESC ESC is now a command to escape from various temporary modes | |
1585 | and states. | |
1586 | ||
1587 | ** M-x pc-bindings-mode sets up bindings compatible with many PC editors. | |
1588 | In particular, Delete and its variants delete forward instead of backward. | |
1589 | Use Backspace to delete backward. | |
1590 | ||
1591 | C-Backspace kills backward a word (as C-Delete normally would). | |
1592 | M-Backspace does undo. | |
1593 | Home and End move to beginning and end of line | |
1594 | C-Home and C-End move to beginning and end of buffer. | |
1595 | ||
1596 | ** The key sequence for evaluating a Lisp expression using the minibuffer | |
1597 | is now ESC :. It used to be ESC ESC, but we moved it to make way for | |
1598 | the ESC ESC ESC feature, on the grounds that people who evaluate Lisp | |
1599 | expressions are experienced users and can cope with a change. | |
1600 | If you prefer the old ESC ESC binding, put in your `~/.emacs': | |
1601 | ||
1602 | (global-set-key "\e\e" 'eval-expression) | |
1603 | ||
1604 | ** The f1 function key is now equivalent to the help key. This is | |
1605 | done with key-translation-map; delete the binding for f1 in that map | |
1606 | if you want to use f1 for something else. | |
1607 | ||
1608 | ** Mouse-3, in the simplest case, still sets the region. But now, it | |
1609 | places the mark where point was, and sets point where you click. | |
1610 | (It used to set the mark where you click and leave point alone.) | |
1611 | ||
1612 | If you position point with Mouse-1, then scroll with the scroll bar | |
1613 | and use Mouse-3, Mouse-3 uses the position you specified with Mouse-1 | |
1614 | even if it has scrolled off the screen (and point is no longer there). | |
1615 | This makes it easier to select a region with the mouse which is bigger | |
1616 | than a screenful. | |
1617 | ||
1618 | Any editing of the buffer, and any cursor motion or scrolling for any | |
1619 | reason other than the scroll bar, cancels the special state set up by | |
1620 | Mouse-1--so that a subsequent Mouse-3 click will use the actual value | |
1621 | of point. | |
1622 | ||
1623 | ** C-mouse-3 now pops up a mode-specific menu of commands--normally | |
1624 | the same ones available in the mode's own menu bar menus. | |
1625 | ||
1626 | ** C-mouse-2 now pops up a menu of faces, indentation, justification, | |
1627 | and certain other text properties. This menu is also available | |
1628 | through the menu-bar Edit menu. It is meant for use with Enriched | |
1629 | mode. | |
1630 | ||
1631 | *** You can use this menu to change the face of the region. | |
1632 | You can also set the face of the region with the new M-g command. | |
1633 | ||
177c0ea7 | 1634 | *** The menu also includes commands for indenting the region, |
a933dad1 DL |
1635 | which locally changes the values of left-margin and fill-column that |
1636 | are used. | |
1637 | ||
1638 | *** All fill functions now indent every line to the left-margin. If | |
1639 | there is also a fill-prefix, that goes after the margin indentation. | |
1640 | ||
1641 | *** Open-line and newline also make sure that the lines they create | |
1642 | are indented to the left margin. | |
1643 | ||
1644 | *** It also allows you to set the "justification" of the region: | |
1645 | whether it should be centered, flush right, and so forth. The fill | |
1646 | functions (including auto-fill-mode) will maintain the justification | |
1647 | and indentation that you request. | |
1648 | ||
1649 | *** The new function `list-colors-display' shows you what colors are | |
1650 | available. This is also accessible from the C-mouse-2 menu. | |
1651 | ||
1652 | ** You can now save and load files including their faces and other | |
1653 | text-properties by using Enriched-mode. Files are saved in an | |
1654 | extended version of the MIME text/enriched format. You can use the | |
1655 | menus described above, or M-g and other keyboard commands, to | |
1656 | alter the formatting information. | |
1657 | ||
1658 | ** C-mouse-1 now pops up the menu for changing the frame's default font. | |
1659 | ||
1660 | ** You can input Hyper, Super, Meta, and Alt characters, as well as | |
1661 | non-ASCII control characters, on an ASCII-only terminal. | |
1662 | To do this, use | |
1663 | ||
1664 | C-x @ h -- hyper | |
1665 | C-x @ s -- super | |
1666 | C-x @ m -- meta | |
1667 | C-x @ a -- alt | |
1668 | C-x @ S -- shift | |
1669 | C-x @ c -- control | |
1670 | ||
1671 | These are not ordinary key sequences; they operate through | |
1672 | function-key-map, which means they can be used even in the | |
1673 | middle of an ordinary key sequence. | |
1674 | ||
1675 | ** Outline minor mode and Hideif mode now use C-c @ as their prefix | |
1676 | character. | |
1677 | ||
1678 | ** Echo area messages are now logged in the "*Messages*" buffer. The | |
1679 | size of this buffer is limited to message-log-max lines. | |
1680 | ||
1681 | ** RET in various special modes for read-only buffers that contain | |
1682 | lists of items now selects the item point is on. These modes include | |
1683 | Dired, Compilation buffers, Buffer-menu, Tar mode, and Occur mode. | |
1684 | (In Info, RET follows the reference near point; in completion list | |
1685 | buffers, RET chooses the completion around point.) | |
1686 | ||
1687 | ** set-background-color now updates the modeline face in a special | |
1688 | way. If that face was previously set up to be reverse video, the | |
1689 | reverse of the default face, then set-background-color updates it so | |
1690 | that it remains the reverse of the default face. | |
1691 | ||
1692 | ** The functions raise-frame and lower-frame are now commands. | |
1693 | When used interactively, they apply to the selected frame. | |
1694 | ||
1695 | ** M-x buffer-menu now displays the buffer list in the selected window. | |
1696 | Use M-x buffer-menu-other-window to display it in another window. | |
1697 | ||
1698 | ** M-w followed by a kill command now *does not* append the text in | |
1699 | the kill ring. In consequence, M-w followed by C-w works as you would | |
1700 | expect: it leaves the top of the kill ring matching the region that | |
1701 | you killed. | |
1702 | ||
1703 | ** In Lisp mode, the C-M-x command now executes defvar forms in a | |
1704 | special way: it unconditionally sets the variable to the specified | |
1705 | default value, if there is one. Normal execution of defvar does not | |
1706 | alter the variable if it already has a non-void value. | |
1707 | ||
1708 | ** In completion list buffers, the left and right arrow keys run the | |
1709 | new commands previous-completion and next-completion. They move one | |
1710 | completion at a time. | |
1711 | ||
1712 | ** While doing completion in the minibuffer, the `prior' or `pageup' | |
1713 | key switches to the completion list window. | |
1714 | ||
1715 | ** When you exit the minibuffer with empty contents, the empty string | |
1716 | is not put in the minibuffer history. | |
1717 | ||
1718 | ** The default buffer for insert-buffer is now the "first" buffer | |
1719 | other than the current one. If you have more than one window, this | |
1720 | is a buffer visible in another window. (Usually it is the buffer | |
1721 | that C-M-v would scroll.) | |
1722 | ||
1723 | ** The etags program is now capable of recording tags based on regular | |
1724 | expressions provided on the command line. | |
1725 | ||
1726 | This new feature allows easy support for constructs not normally | |
1727 | handled by etags, such as the macros frequently used in big C/C++ | |
1728 | projects to define project-specific structures. It also enables the | |
1729 | use of etags and TAGS files for languages not supported by etags. | |
1730 | ||
1731 | The Emacs manual section on Tags contains explanations and examples | |
7877f373 | 1732 | for Emacs's DEFVAR, VHDL, Cobol, PostScript and TCL. |
a933dad1 DL |
1733 | |
1734 | ** Various mode-specific commands that used to be bound to C-c LETTER | |
1735 | have been moved. | |
1736 | ||
1737 | *** In gnus-uu mode, gnus-uu-interactive-scan-directory is now on C-c C-d, | |
1738 | and gnus-uu-interactive-save-current-file is on C-c C-z. | |
1739 | ||
1740 | *** In Scribe mode, scribe-insert-environment is now on C-c C-v, | |
1741 | scribe-chapter is on C-c C-c, scribe-subsection is on C-c C-s, | |
1742 | scribe-section is on C-c C-t, scribe-bracket-region-be is on C-c C-e, | |
1743 | scribe-italicize-word is on C-c C-i, scribe-bold-word is on C-c C-b, | |
1744 | and scribe-underline-word is on C-c C-u. | |
1745 | ||
1746 | *** In Gomoku mode, gomoku-human-takes-back is now on C-c C-b, | |
1747 | gomoku-human-plays is on C-c C-p, gomoku-human-resigns is on C-c C-r, | |
1748 | and gomoku-emacs-plays is on C-c C-e. | |
1749 | ||
1750 | *** In the Outline mode defined in allout.el, | |
1751 | outline-rebullet-current-heading is now on C-c *. | |
1752 | ||
1753 | ** M-s in Info now searches through the nodes of the Info file, | |
1754 | just like s. The alias M-s was added so that you can use the same | |
1755 | command for searches in both Info and Rmail. | |
1756 | ||
1757 | ** iso-acc.el now lets you enter inverted-! and inverted-? | |
1758 | with the sequences ~! and ~?. | |
1759 | ||
1760 | ** M-x compare-windows now pushes mark in both windows before | |
1761 | it starts moving point. | |
1762 | ||
1763 | ** There are two new commands in Dired, A (dired-do-search) | |
1764 | and Q (dired-do-query-replace). These are similar to tags-search and | |
1765 | tags-query-replace, but instead of searching the list of files that | |
1766 | appears in a tags table, they search all the files marked in Dired. | |
1767 | ||
1768 | ** Changes to dabbrev. | |
1769 | ||
1770 | A new function, `dabbrev-completion' (bound to M-C-/), expands the | |
1771 | unique part of an abbreviation. | |
1772 | ||
1773 | Dabbrev now looks for expansions in other buffers, looks for symbols | |
1774 | instead of words and it works in the minibuffer. | |
1775 | ||
1776 | Dabbrev can be customized to work for shell scripts, with variables | |
1777 | that sometimes have and sometimes haven't a leading "$". See the | |
1778 | variable 'dabbrev-abbrev-skip-leading-regexp'. | |
1779 | ||
1780 | ** In Rmail, the command rmail-input-menu has been eliminated. The | |
1781 | feature of selecting an Rmail file from a menu is now implemented in | |
1782 | another way. | |
1783 | ||
1784 | ** Bookmarks changes. | |
1785 | ||
1786 | *** It now works to set bookmarks in Info nodes. | |
1787 | ||
177c0ea7 | 1788 | *** Bookmarks can have annotations; type "C-h m" after doing |
a933dad1 DL |
1789 | "M-x list-bookmarks", for more information on annotations. |
1790 | ||
1791 | *** The bookmark-jump popup menu function is now `bookmark-menu-jump', for | |
1792 | those who bind it to a mouse click. | |
1793 | ||
1794 | *** The default bookmarks file name is now "~/.emacs.bmk". If you | |
1795 | already have a bookmarks file, it will be renamed automagically when | |
1796 | you next load it. | |
1797 | ||
1798 | ** New package, ps-print. | |
1799 | ||
1800 | The ps-print package generates PostScript printouts of buffers or | |
1801 | regions, and includes face attributes such as color, underlining, | |
1802 | boldface and italics in the printed output. | |
1803 | ||
1804 | ** New package, msb. | |
1805 | ||
1806 | The msb package provides a buffer-menu in the menubar with separate | |
1807 | menus for different types of buffers. | |
1808 | ||
1809 | ** `cpp.el' is a new library that can highlight or hide parts of a C | |
1810 | file according to C preprocessor conditionals. To try it, run the | |
1811 | command M-x cpp-highlight-buffer. | |
1812 | ||
1813 | ** Changes in CC mode. | |
1814 | ||
1815 | *** c-set-offset and related functions and variables can now accept | |
1816 | variable symbols. Also ++ and -- which mean 2* positive and negative | |
1817 | c-basic-offset respectively. | |
1818 | ||
1819 | *** New variable, c-recognize-knr-p, which controls whether K&R C | |
1820 | constructs will be recognized. Trying to recognize K&R constructs is a | |
1821 | time hog so if you're programming strictly in ANSI C, set this | |
1822 | variable to nil (it should already be nil in c++-mode). | |
1823 | ||
1824 | *** New variable, c-hanging-comment-ender-p for controlling | |
1825 | c-fill-paragraph's behavior. | |
1826 | ||
1827 | *** New syntactic symbol: statement-case-open. This is assigned to lines | |
1828 | containing an open brace just after a case/default label. | |
1829 | ||
1830 | *** New variable, c-progress-interval, which controls minibuffer update | |
cd1181db | 1831 | message displays during long re-indentation. This is a new feature |
a933dad1 DL |
1832 | which prints percentage complete messages at specified intervals. |
1833 | ||
177c0ea7 | 1834 | ** Makefile mode changes. |
a933dad1 DL |
1835 | |
1836 | *** The electric keys are not enabled by default. | |
1837 | ||
1838 | *** There is now a mode-specific menu bar menu. | |
1839 | ||
1840 | *** The mode supports font-lock, add-log, and imenu. | |
1841 | ||
1842 | *** The command M-TAB does completion of target names and variable names. | |
1843 | ||
1844 | ** icomplete.el now works more like a minor mode. Use M-x icomplete-mode | |
1845 | to turn it on and off. | |
1846 | ||
1847 | Icomplete now supports an `icomplete-minibuffer-setup-hook', which is | |
1848 | run on minibuffer setup whenever icompletion will be occurring. This | |
1849 | hook can be used to customize interoperation of icomplete with other | |
1850 | minibuffer-specific packages, eg rsz-mini. See the doc string for | |
1851 | more info. | |
1852 | ||
1853 | ** Ediff change. | |
1854 | ||
1855 | Use ediff-revision instead of vc-ediff. It also replaces rcs-ediff, | |
1856 | for those who use that; if you want to use a version control package | |
1857 | other than vc.el, you must set the variable | |
1858 | ediff-version-control-package to specify which package. | |
1859 | ||
1860 | ** VC now supports branches with RCS. | |
1861 | ||
1862 | You can use C-u C-x C-q to select any branch or version by number. | |
1863 | It reads the version number or branch number with the minibuffer, | |
1864 | then checks out the file unlocked. | |
1865 | ||
1866 | Type C-x C-q again to lock the selected branch or version. | |
1867 | When you check in changes to that branch or version, there are two | |
1868 | possibilities: | |
1869 | ||
1870 | -- If you've selected a branch, or a version at the tip of a branch, | |
1871 | then the new version adds to that branch. If you wish to create a | |
1872 | new branch, use C-u C-x C-q to specify a version number when you check | |
1873 | in the new version. | |
1874 | ||
1875 | -- If you've selected an inner version which is not the latest in its | |
1876 | branch, then the new version automatically creates a new branch. | |
1877 | ||
1878 | ** VC now supports CVS as well as RCS and SCCS. | |
1879 | ||
1880 | Since there are no locks in CVS, some things behave slightly | |
1881 | different when the backend is CVS. When vc-next-action is invoked | |
1882 | in a directory handled by CVS, it does the following: | |
1883 | ||
1884 | If the file is not already registered, this registers it for version | |
1885 | control. This does a "cvs add", but no "cvs commit". | |
1886 | If the file is added but not committed, it is committed. | |
1887 | If the file has not been changed, neither in your working area or | |
1888 | in the repository, a message is printed and nothing is done. | |
1889 | If your working file is changed, but the repository file is | |
1890 | unchanged, this pops up a buffer for entry of a log message; when you | |
1891 | finish the log message with C-c C-c, that checks in the resulting | |
1892 | changes along with the log message as change commentary. A writable | |
1893 | file remains in existence. | |
1894 | ||
1895 | If vc-next-action changes the repository file, it asks you | |
1896 | whether to merge in the changes into your working copy. | |
1897 | ||
1898 | vc-directory, when started in a CVS file hierarchy, reports | |
1899 | all files that are modified (and thus need to be committed). | |
1900 | (When the backend is RCS or SCCS vc-directory reports all | |
1901 | locked files). | |
1902 | ||
1903 | VC has no support for running the initial "cvs checkout" to get a | |
1904 | working copy of a module. You can only use VC in a working copy of | |
1905 | a module. | |
1906 | ||
1907 | You can disable the CVS support as follows: | |
1908 | ||
1909 | (setq vc-master-templates (delq 'vc-find-cvs-master vc-master-templates)) | |
1910 | ||
1911 | or by setting vc-handle-cvs to nil. | |
1912 | ||
1913 | This may be desirable if you run a non-standard version of CVS, or | |
1914 | if CVS was compiled with FORCE_USE_EDITOR or (possibly) | |
1915 | RELATIVE_REPOS. | |
1916 | ||
1917 | ** Comint and shell mode changes: | |
1918 | ||
1919 | *** Completion works with file names containing quoted characters. | |
1920 | ||
1921 | File names containing special characters (such as " ", "!", etc.) that are | |
b72333b2 | 1922 | quoted with a "\" character are recognized during completion. Special |
a933dad1 DL |
1923 | characters are quoted when they are inserted during completion. |
1924 | ||
1925 | *** You can use M-x comint-truncate-buffer to truncate the buffer. | |
1926 | ||
1927 | When this command is run, the buffer is truncated to a maximum number | |
1928 | of lines, specified by the variable comint-buffer-maximum-size. Just | |
1929 | like the command comint-strip-ctrl-m, this can be run automatically | |
1930 | during process output by doing this: | |
1931 | ||
1932 | (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions | |
1933 | 'comint-truncate-buffer) | |
1934 | ||
1935 | ** Telnet mode buffer name changed. | |
1936 | ||
1937 | The buffer name for a Telnet buffer is now *telnet-HOST*, not | |
1938 | *HOST-telnet*. This is for consistency with other Emacs packages. | |
1939 | ||
1940 | ** M-x man (man) is now faster and more robust. On systems where the | |
1941 | entire man page is indented, the indentation is removed. | |
1942 | ||
1943 | The user option names that used to end in -p now end in -flag. The | |
1944 | new names are: Man-reuse-okay-flag, Man-downcase-section-letters-flag, | |
1945 | Man-circular-pages-flag. The Man-notify user option has been renamed to | |
1946 | Man-notify-method and accepts one more value, `pushy', that just | |
1947 | switches the current buffer to the manpage buffer, without switching | |
1948 | frames nor changing your windows configuration. | |
1949 | ||
1950 | A new user option Man-fontify-manpage-flag disables fontification | |
1951 | (thus speeding up man) when set to nil. Default is to fontify if a | |
1952 | window system is used. Two new user options Man-overstrike-face | |
1953 | (default 'bold) and Man-underline-face (default 'underline) can be set | |
1954 | to the preferred faces to be used for the words that man overstrikes | |
6772c8e1 | 1955 | and underlines. Useful for those who like colored man pages. |
a933dad1 DL |
1956 | |
1957 | Two new interactive functions are provided: Man-cleanup-manpage and | |
1958 | Man-fontify-manpage. Both can be used on a buffer that contains the | |
1959 | output of a `rsh host man manpage' command, or the output of an | |
1960 | `nroff -man -Tman manpage' command to make them readable. | |
1961 | Man-cleanup-manpage is faster, but does not fontify. | |
1962 | ||
1963 | ** The new function modify-face makes it easy to specify | |
1964 | all the attributes of a face, all at once. | |
1965 | ||
1966 | ** Faces now support background stippling. | |
1967 | ||
1968 | Use the command set-face-stipple to specify the stipple-pattern for a | |
1969 | face. Use face-stipple to access the specified stipple pattern. The | |
1970 | existing face functions now handle the stipple pattern when | |
1971 | appropriate. | |
1972 | ||
1973 | If you specify one of the standard gray colors as a face background | |
1974 | color, and your display doesn't handle gray, Emacs automatically uses | |
1975 | stipple instead to get the same effect. | |
1976 | ||
1977 | ** Changes in Font Lock mode. | |
1978 | ||
1979 | *** Fontification | |
1980 | ||
1981 | Two new default faces are provided; `font-lock-variable-name-face' and | |
1982 | `font-lock-reference-face'. The face `font-lock-doc-string-face' has | |
1983 | been removed since it is the same as the existing | |
1984 | `font-lock-string-face'. Where appropriate, fontification | |
1985 | automatically uses these new faces. | |
1986 | ||
1987 | Fontification via commands `font-lock-mode' and | |
1988 | `font-lock-fontify-buffer' is now cleanly interruptible (i.e., with | |
1989 | C-g). If you interrupt during the fontification process, the buffer | |
1990 | remains in its previous modified state and all highlighting is removed | |
1991 | from the buffer. | |
1992 | ||
1993 | For C/C++ modes, Font Lock mode is much faster but highlights much | |
1994 | more. Other modes are faster/more extensive/more discriminatory, or a | |
1995 | combination of these. | |
1996 | ||
1997 | To enable Font Lock mode, add the new function `turn-on-font-lock' in | |
1998 | one of the following ways: | |
1999 | ||
2000 | (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
2001 | ||
2002 | Or for any visited file with: | |
2003 | ||
2004 | (add-hook 'find-file-hooks 'turn-on-font-lock) | |
2005 | ||
2006 | *** Supports color and grayscale displays | |
2007 | ||
2008 | Font Lock mode supports different ways of highlighting, depending on | |
2009 | the type of display and background shade. Attributes (face color, | |
2010 | bold, italic and underline, and display type and background mode) can | |
2011 | be controlled either from Emacs Lisp or X resources. | |
2012 | ||
2013 | See the new variables `font-lock-display-type' and | |
2014 | `font-lock-face-attributes'. | |
2015 | ||
2016 | *** Supports more modes | |
2017 | ||
2018 | The following modes are directly supported: | |
2019 | ||
2020 | ada-mode, asm-mode, bibtex-mode, c++-c-mode, c++-mode, c-mode, | |
2021 | change-log-mode, compilation-mode, dired-mode, emacs-lisp-mode, | |
2022 | fortran-mode, latex-mode, lisp-mode, mail-mode, makefile-mode, | |
2023 | outline-mode, pascal-mode, perl-mode, plain-tex-mode, rmail-mode, | |
2024 | rmail-summary-mode, scheme-mode, shell-mode, slitex-mode, tex-mode, | |
2025 | texinfo-mode. | |
2026 | ||
2027 | See the new variables `font-lock-defaults-alist' and | |
2028 | `font-lock-defaults'. | |
2029 | ||
2030 | Some modes support different levels of fontification. You can choose | |
2031 | to use the minimum or maximum available decoration by changing the | |
2032 | value of the new variable `font-lock-maximum-decoration'. | |
2033 | ||
2034 | Programmers are urged to make available to the community their own | |
2035 | keywords for modes not yet supported. See font-lock.el for | |
2036 | information about efficiency. | |
2037 | ||
2038 | *** fast-lock | |
2039 | ||
2040 | The fast-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by saving font choices | |
2041 | in associated cache files. When you visit a file with Font Lock mode | |
2042 | and Fast Lock mode turned on for the first time, the file's buffer is | |
2043 | fontified as normal. When certain events occur (such as exiting | |
2044 | Emacs), Fast Lock saves the highlighting in a cache file. When you | |
2045 | subsequently visit this file, its cache is used to restore the | |
2046 | highlighting. | |
2047 | ||
2048 | To use this package, put in your `~/.emacs': | |
2049 | ||
2050 | (add-hook 'font-lock-mode-hook 'turn-on-fast-lock) | |
2051 | ||
2052 | To control the use of caches, see the documentation for `fast-lock-mode'. | |
2053 | ||
2054 | ** You can tell pop-to-buffer to display certain buffers in the selected | |
2055 | window rather than finding some other window to display them in. | |
2056 | There are two variables you can use to specify these buffers. | |
2057 | ||
2058 | same-window-buffer-names holds a list of buffer names; if a buffer's | |
2059 | name appears in this list, pop-to-buffer puts it in the selected window. | |
2060 | ||
2061 | same-window-regexps holds a list of regexps--if any one of them | |
2062 | matches a buffer's name, then pop-to-buffer puts that buffer in the | |
2063 | selected window. | |
2064 | ||
2065 | The default values of these variables are not nil: they list various | |
2066 | buffers that normally appear, when you as for them, in the selected | |
2067 | window. These include shell buffers, mail buffers, telnet buffers, | |
2068 | and others. By removing elements from these variables, you can ask | |
2069 | Emacs to display those buffers in separate windows. | |
2070 | ||
2071 | ** The special-display-buffer-names and special-display-regexps lists | |
2072 | have been generalized. An element may now be a list. The car of the list | |
2073 | is the buffer name or regular expression for matching buffer names. | |
2074 | ||
2075 | The cdr of the list can be an alist specifying additional frame | |
2076 | parameters for use in constructing the special display frame. | |
2077 | ||
2078 | Alternatively, the cdr can have this form: | |
2079 | ||
2080 | (FUNCTION ARGS...) | |
2081 | ||
2082 | where FUNCTION is a symbol. Then the frame is constructed by calling | |
2083 | FUNCTION; its first argument is the buffer, and its remaining | |
2084 | arguments are ARGS. | |
2085 | ||
2086 | ** If the environment variable REPLYTO is set, its value is the default | |
2087 | for mail-default-reply-to. | |
2088 | ||
2089 | ** When you send a message in Emacs, if you specify an Rmail file with | |
2090 | the FCC: header field, Emacs converts the message to Rmail format | |
2091 | before writing it. Thus, the file never contains anything but Rmail | |
2092 | format messages. | |
2093 | ||
2094 | ** The new variable mail-from-style controls whether the From: header | |
2095 | should include the sender's full name, and if so, which format to use. | |
2096 | ||
2097 | ** The new variable mail-personal-alias-file specifies the name of the | |
2098 | user's personal aliases. This defaults to the file ~/.mailrc. | |
2099 | mailabbrev.el used to have its own variable for this purpose | |
2100 | (mail-abbrev-mailrc-file). That variable is no longer used. | |
2101 | ||
2102 | ** In Buffer-Menu mode, the d and C-d commands (which mark buffers for | |
2103 | deletion) now accept a prefix argument which serves as a repeat count. | |
2104 | ||
2105 | ** Changes in BibTeX mode. | |
2106 | ||
2107 | *** Reference keys can now be entered with TAB completion. All | |
2108 | reference keys defined in that buffer and all labels that appear in | |
2109 | crossreference entries are object to completion. | |
2110 | ||
2111 | *** Braces are supported as field delimiters in addition to quotes. | |
2112 | BibTeX entries may have brace-delimited and quote-delimited fields | |
2113 | intermixed. The delimiters generated for new entries are specified by | |
2114 | the variables bibtex-field-left-delimiter and | |
2115 | bibtex-field-right-delimiter on a buffer-local basis. Those variables | |
2116 | default to braces, since it is easier to put quote accented characters | |
2117 | (as the german umlauts) into a brace-delimited entry. | |
2118 | ||
2119 | *** The function bibtex-clean-entry can now be invoked with a prefix | |
2120 | argument. In this case, a label is automatically generated from | |
2121 | various fields in the record. If bibtex-clean-entry is invoked on a | |
2122 | record without label, a label is also generated automatically. | |
2123 | Various variables (all beginning with `bibtex-autokey-') control the | |
2124 | creation of that key. The variable bibtex-autokey-edit-before-use | |
2125 | determines, if the user is allowed to edit auto-generated reference | |
2126 | keys before they are used. | |
2127 | ||
2128 | *** A New function bibtex-complete-string completes strings with | |
2129 | respect to the strings defined in this buffer and a set of predefined | |
2130 | strings (initialized to the string macros defined in the standard | |
2131 | BibTeX style files) in the same way in which ispell-complete-word | |
2132 | works with respect to words in a dictionary. Candidates for | |
2133 | bibtex-complete-string are initialized from variable | |
2134 | bibtex-predefined-strings and by parsing the files found in | |
2135 | bibtex-string-files for @String definitions. | |
2136 | ||
2137 | *** Every reference/field pair has now attached a comment which | |
2138 | appears in the echo area when this field is edited. These comments | |
2139 | should provide useful hints for BibTeX usage, especially for BibTeX | |
2140 | beginners. New variable bibtex-help-message determines if these help | |
2141 | messages are to appear in the minibuffer when moving to a text entry. | |
2142 | ||
2143 | *** Inscriptions of menu bar changed from "Entry Types" to | |
2144 | "Entry-Types" and "Bibtex Edit" to "BibTeX-Edit". | |
2145 | ||
2146 | *** The variable bibtex-include-OPTcrossref is now not longer a binary | |
2147 | switch but a list of reference names which should contain a crossref | |
2148 | field. E.g., you can tell bibtex-mode you want a crossref field for | |
2149 | @InProceedings and @InBook entries but for no other. | |
2150 | ||
2151 | *** The function validate-bibtex-buffer was completely rewritten to | |
2152 | validate if a buffer is syntactically correct. find-bibtex-duplicates | |
2153 | is no longer a function itself but was moved into | |
2154 | validate-bibtex-buffer. | |
2155 | ||
2156 | *** Cleaning a BibTeX entry tests, if necessary fields are there. | |
2157 | E.g., if you tell bibtex-mode to include a crossref entry, some fields | |
2158 | are optional which would be required without the crossref entry. If | |
2159 | you now leave the crossref entry empty and do a bibtex-clean-entry | |
2160 | with some now required fields left empty, version 2.0 of bibtex.el | |
2161 | complains about the absence of these fields, whereas version 1.3 | |
2162 | didn't. | |
2163 | ||
2164 | *** Default value for variables bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries and | |
2165 | bibtex-sort-ignore-string-entries is now t. | |
2166 | ||
2167 | *** All interactive functions are renamed to begin with `bibtex-'. | |
2168 | ||
2169 | *** Keybindings with \C-c\C-e entry changed for unification. Often | |
2170 | used reference types are now on control-modified keys, mediocre used | |
2171 | types are on unmodified keys, seldom used types are on shift-modified | |
2172 | keys and almost never used types on meta-modified keys. | |
9a21d88b | 2173 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2174 | \f |
2175 | * Configuration Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
2176 | ||
2177 | ** Emacs now uses directory /usr/local/share for most of its installed | |
2178 | files. This follows a GNU convention for directory usage. | |
2179 | ||
2180 | ** The option --with-x11 is no longer supported. | |
2181 | X11 is the only version of X that Emacs 19.29 supports; | |
2182 | use --with-x if you need to request X support explicitly. | |
2183 | (Normally this should not be necessary, since configure should | |
2184 | automatically enable X support if X is installed on your machine.) | |
2185 | ||
2186 | ** If you use the site-init.el file to set the variable | |
2187 | mail-host-address to a string in the dumped Emacs, that string becomes | |
2188 | the default host address for initializing user-mail-address. | |
2189 | It is used instead of the value of (system-name). | |
9a21d88b | 2190 | |
a933dad1 DL |
2191 | \f |
2192 | * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.29 | |
2193 | ||
2194 | ** Basic Lisp | |
2195 | ||
2196 | *** The range of integer values is now at least 2**28 on all machines. | |
2197 | This means the maximum size of a buffer is at least 2**27-1, | |
2198 | or 134,217,727. | |
2199 | ||
2200 | *** You can now use Common Lisp syntax for the backquote and comma | |
2201 | macros. Thus, you can now write `(x ,y z) instead of (` (x (, y) z)). | |
2202 | ||
2203 | The old syntax is still accepted. | |
2204 | ||
2205 | *** The new function rassoc is like assoc, except that it compares the | |
2206 | key against the cdr of each alist element, where assoc would compare | |
2207 | it against the car of each alist element. | |
2208 | ||
2209 | *** The new function unintern deletes a symbol from an obarray. The | |
2210 | first argument can be the symbol to delete, or a string giving its | |
2211 | name. The second argument specifies the obarray (nil means the | |
2212 | current default obarray). | |
2213 | ||
2214 | If the specified symbol is not in the obarray, or if there's no symbol | |
2215 | in the obarray matching the specified string, unintern does nothing | |
2216 | and returns nil. If it does delete a symbol, it returns t. | |
2217 | ||
2218 | *** You can specify an alternative read function for use by load and | |
2219 | eval-region by binding the variable load-read-function to some other | |
2220 | function. This function should accept one argument just like read. | |
2221 | If load-read-function is nil, load and eval-region use ordinary read. | |
2222 | ||
2223 | *** The new function `type-of' takes any object as argument, and | |
2224 | returns a symbol identifying the type of that object--one of `symbol', | |
2225 | `integer', `float', `string', `cons', `vector', `marker', `overlay', | |
2226 | `window', `buffer', `subr', `compiled-function', | |
2227 | `window-configuration', `process'. | |
2228 | ||
2229 | *** When you use eval-after-load for a file that is already loaded, it | |
2230 | executes the FORM right away. As before, if the file is not yet | |
2231 | loaded, it arranges to execute FORM if and when the file is loaded | |
2232 | later. The result is: if you have called eval-after-load for a file, | |
2233 | and if that file has been loaded, then regardless of the order of | |
2234 | these two events, the specified form has been evaluated. | |
2235 | ||
2236 | *** The Lisp construct #@NUMBER now skips the next NUMBER characters, | |
2237 | treating them as a comment. | |
2238 | ||
2239 | You would not want to use this in a file you edit by hand, but it is | |
2240 | useful for commenting out parts of machine-generated files. | |
2241 | ||
2242 | *** Two new functions, `plist-get' and `plist-put', | |
2243 | allow you to modify and retrieve values from lists formatted as property-lists. | |
2244 | They work like `get' and `put', but operate on any list. | |
2245 | `plist-put' returns the modified property-list; you must store it | |
2246 | back where you got it. | |
2247 | ||
2248 | *** The new function add-to-list is called with two elements, | |
2249 | a variable that holds a list and a new element. | |
2250 | It adds the element to the list unless it is already present. | |
2251 | It compares elements using `equal'. Here is an example: | |
2252 | ||
2253 | (setq foo '(a b)) => (a b) | |
2254 | ||
2255 | (add-to-list 'foo 'c) => (c a b) | |
2256 | ||
2257 | (add-to-list 'foo 'b) => (c a b) | |
2258 | ||
2259 | foo => (c a b) | |
2260 | ||
2261 | ** Changes in compilation. | |
2262 | ||
2263 | Functions and variables loaded from a byte-compiled file | |
2264 | now refer to the file for their doc strings. | |
2265 | ||
2266 | This has a few consequences: | |
2267 | ||
2268 | -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory. | |
2269 | -- Reference to doc strings is a little slower (the same speed | |
2270 | as reference to the doc strings of primitive and preloaded functions). | |
2271 | -- The compiled files will not work in old versions of Emacs. | |
2272 | -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer | |
2273 | find these doc strings. | |
2274 | -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new | |
2275 | version), then further access to documentation strings will get | |
2276 | nonsense results. | |
2277 | ||
2278 | The byte compiler now optionally supports lazy loading of compiled | |
2279 | functions' definitions. If you enable this feature when you compile, | |
2280 | loading the compiled file does not actually bring the function | |
2281 | definitions into core. Instead it creates references to the compiled | |
2282 | file, and brings each function's definition into core the first time | |
2283 | you call that function, or when you force it with the new function | |
2284 | `fetch-bytecode'. | |
2285 | ||
2286 | Using the lazy loading feature has a few consequences: | |
2287 | ||
2288 | -- Loading the file is faster and uses less memory. | |
2289 | -- Calling any function in the file for the first time is slower. | |
2290 | -- If you move the compiled file after loading it, Emacs can no longer | |
2291 | find the function definitions. | |
2292 | -- If you alter the compiled file (such as by compiling a new | |
2293 | version), then further access to functions not already loaded | |
2294 | will get nonsense results. | |
2295 | ||
2296 | To enable the lazy loading feature, set up a non-nil file local | |
2297 | variable binding for the variable `byte-compile-dynamic' in the Lisp | |
2298 | source file. For example, put this on the first line: | |
2299 | ||
2300 | -*-byte-compile-dynamic: t;-*- | |
2301 | ||
2302 | It's a good idea to use the lazy loading feature for a file that | |
2303 | contains many functions, most of which are not actually used by a | |
2304 | given user in a given session. | |
2305 | ||
2306 | To turn off the basic feature of referring to the file for doc | |
2307 | strings, set byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings to nil. You can do this | |
2308 | globally, or for one source file by adding this to the first line: | |
2309 | ||
2310 | -*-byte-compile-dynamic-docstrings: nil;-*- | |
2311 | ||
2312 | ** Strings | |
2313 | ||
2314 | *** Do not pass integer arguments to `concat' (or `vconcat' or | |
2315 | `append'). We are phasing out the old unrecommended support for | |
2316 | integers as arguments to these functions, in preparation for treating | |
2317 | numbers as single characters in a future release. To concatenate | |
2318 | numbers in string form, use `number-to-string' first, or rewrite the | |
2319 | call to use `format' instead of `concat'. | |
2320 | ||
2321 | *** The new function match-string returns the string of text matched at | |
2322 | the given parenthesized expression by the last regexp search, or nil | |
2323 | if there was no match. If the last match was by `string-match' on a | |
2324 | string, the string must be given. Therefore, this function can be | |
2325 | used in place of `buffer-substring' and `substring', when using | |
2326 | `match-beginning' and `match-end' to find match positions. | |
2327 | ||
2328 | (match-string N) or (match-string N STRING) | |
2329 | ||
2330 | *** The function replace-match now accepts an optional fourth argument, | |
2331 | STRING. Use this after performing string-match on STRING, to replace | |
2332 | the portion of STRING that was matched. When used in this way, | |
2333 | replace-match returns a newly created string which is the same as | |
2334 | STRING except for the matched portion. | |
2335 | ||
2336 | *** The new function buffer-substring-no-properties | |
2337 | is like buffer-substring except that the string it returns | |
2338 | has no text properties. | |
2339 | ||
2340 | *** The function `equal' now considers two strings to be different | |
2341 | if they don't have the same text properties. | |
2342 | ||
2343 | ** Completion | |
2344 | ||
2345 | *** all-completions now takes an optional fourth argument. | |
2346 | If that argument is non-nil, completions that start with a space | |
2347 | are ignored unless the initial string also starts with a space. | |
2348 | (This used to happen unconditionally.) | |
2349 | ||
2350 | ** Local Variables | |
2351 | ||
2352 | *** Local hook variables. | |
2353 | ||
2354 | There is now a clean way to give a hook variable a buffer-local value. | |
2355 | Call the function `make-local-hook' to do this. | |
2356 | ||
2357 | Once a hook variable is buffer-local, you can add hooks to it either | |
2358 | globally or locally. run-hooks runs the local hook functions | |
2359 | of the current buffer, then all the global hook functions. | |
2360 | ||
2361 | The functions add-hook and remove-hook take an additional optional | |
2362 | argument LOCAL which says whether to add (or remove) a local hook | |
2363 | function or a global one. | |
2364 | ||
2365 | Local hooks use t as an element of the (local) value of the hook | |
2366 | variable as a flag meaning to use the global value also. | |
2367 | ||
2368 | *** The new function local-variable-p tells you whether a particular | |
2369 | variable is buffer-local in the current buffer or a specified buffer. | |
2370 | ||
2371 | ** Editing Facilities | |
2372 | ||
2373 | *** The function copy-region-as-kill no longer sets this-command; | |
2374 | as a result, a following kill command will not normally append | |
2375 | to the text saved by copy-region-as-kill. | |
2376 | ||
2377 | *** Regular expression searching and matching no longer performs full | |
2378 | Posix backtracking by default. They now stop with the first match found | |
2379 | instead of looking for the longest match--just as they did in Emacs 18. | |
2380 | The reason for this change is to get higher speed. | |
2381 | ||
2382 | There are new functions you can use if you really want to search or | |
2383 | match with Posix behavior: posix-search-forward, | |
2384 | posix-search-backward, posix-looking-at, and posix-string-match. Call | |
2385 | these just like re-search-forward, re-search-backward, looking-at, and | |
2386 | string-match. | |
2387 | ||
2388 | ** Files | |
2389 | ||
2390 | *** The new variable `format-alist' defines file formats, | |
2391 | which are ways of translating between the data in a file and things | |
2392 | (text, text-properties, and possibly other information) in a buffer. | |
2393 | ||
2394 | `format-alist' has one element for each format. Each element is a | |
2395 | list like this: | |
2396 | (NAME DOC-STRING REGEXP FROM-FN TO-FN MODIFY MODE-FN) | |
2397 | containing the name of the format, a documentation string, a regular | |
2398 | expression which is used to recognize files in that format, a decoding | |
2399 | function, an encoding function, a flag that indicates whether the | |
2400 | encoding function modifies the buffer, and a mode function. | |
2401 | ||
177c0ea7 | 2402 | FROM-FN is called to decode files in that format; it gets two args, BEGIN |
a933dad1 DL |
2403 | and END, and can make any modifications it likes, returning the new |
2404 | end position. It must make sure that the beginning of the file no | |
2405 | longer matches REGEXP, or else it will get called again. | |
2406 | TO-FN is called to encode a region into that format; it is also passed BEGIN | |
2407 | and END, and either returns a list of annotations as in | |
2408 | `write-region-annotate-functions', or modifies the region and returns | |
2409 | the new end position. | |
2410 | MODIFY, if non-nil, means the TO-FN modifies the region. If nil, TO-FN may | |
2411 | not make any changes and should return a list of annotations. | |
2412 | ||
2413 | `insert-file-contents' checks the beginning of the file that it is | |
2414 | inserting to see if it matches one of the regexps. If so, then it | |
2415 | calls the decoding function, and then looks for another match. When | |
2416 | visiting a file, it also calls the mode function, and sets the | |
2417 | variable `buffer-file-format' to the list of formats that the file | |
2418 | used. | |
2419 | ||
2420 | `write-region' calls the encoding functions for each format in | |
2421 | `buffer-file-format' before it writes the file. To save a file in a | |
2422 | different format, either set `buffer-file-format' to a different | |
2423 | value, or call the new function `format-write-file'. | |
2424 | ||
2425 | Since some encoding functions may be slow, you can request that | |
2426 | auto-save use a format different from the buffer's default by setting | |
2427 | the variable `auto-save-file-format' to the desired format. This will | |
2428 | determine the format of all auto-save files. | |
2429 | ||
2430 | *** The new function file-ownership-preserved-p tells you whether | |
2431 | deleting a file and recreating it would keep the file's owner | |
2432 | unchanged. | |
2433 | ||
2434 | *** The new function file-regular-p returns t if a file | |
2435 | is a "regular" file (not a directory, symlink, named pipe, | |
2436 | terminal, or other I/O device). | |
2437 | ||
2438 | *** The new function file-name-sans-extension discards the extension | |
2439 | of a file name. You call it with a file name, and returns a string | |
2440 | lacking the extension. | |
2441 | ||
2442 | *** The variable path-separator is a string which says which | |
2443 | character separates directories in a search path. It is ":" | |
2444 | for Unix and GNU systems, ";" for MSDOG and Windows NT. | |
2445 | ||
2446 | ** Commands and Key Sequences | |
2447 | ||
2448 | *** Key sequences consisting of C-c followed by {, }, <, >, : or ; are | |
2449 | now reserved for major modes. Sequences consisting of C-c followed by | |
2450 | any other punctuation character are now meant for minor modes. We don't | |
2451 | plan to convert all existing major modes to stop using those sequences, | |
2452 | but we hope to keep them to a minimum. | |
2453 | ||
2454 | *** When the post-command-hook or the pre-command-hook gets an error, the error | |
2455 | is silently ignored. Emacs no longer sets the hook variable to nil when this | |
2456 | happens. Meanwhile, the hook functions can now alter the hook variable in | |
2457 | a normal fashion; there is no need to do anything special. | |
2458 | ||
2459 | *** define-key, lookup-key, and various other functions for changing or | |
2460 | looking up key bindings now let you write an event type with a list | |
2461 | like (ctrl meta newline) or (meta ?d), as in XEmacs. (ctrl meta newline) | |
2462 | is equivalent to the event type symbol C-M-newline, and (meta ?d) | |
2463 | is equivalent to the character ?\M-d. | |
2464 | ||
2465 | *** The function event-convert-list converts a list such as | |
2466 | (meta ?d) into the corresponding event type (a symbol or integer). | |
2467 | ||
2468 | *** In an interactive spec, `k' means to read a key sequence. In this | |
2469 | key sequence, upper case characters and shifted function keys which | |
2470 | have no bindings are converted to lower case if that makes them | |
2471 | defined. | |
2472 | ||
2473 | The new interactive code `K' reads a key sequence similarly, but does | |
2474 | not convert the last event. `K' is useful for reading a key sequence | |
2475 | to be given a binding. | |
2476 | ||
2477 | *** The variable overriding-local-map now has no effect on the menu bar | |
2478 | display unless overriding-local-map-menu-flag is non-nil. This is why | |
2479 | incremental search no longer temporarily changes the menu bars. | |
2480 | ||
2481 | Note that overriding-local-map does still affect the execution of key | |
2482 | sequences entered using the menu bar. So if you use | |
2483 | overriding-local-map, and a menu bar key sequence comes in, you should | |
2484 | make sure to clear overriding-local-map before that key sequence gets | |
2485 | looked up and executed. But this is what you'd normally do anyway: | |
2486 | programs that use overriding-local-map normally exit and "put back" | |
2487 | any event such as menu-bar that they do not handle specially. | |
2488 | ||
2489 | *** The new variable `overriding-terminal-local-map' is like | |
2490 | overriding-local-map, but is specific to a single terminal. | |
2491 | ||
2492 | *** delete-frame events. | |
2493 | ||
2494 | When you use the X window manager's "delete window" command, this now | |
2495 | generates a delete-frame event. The standard definition of this event | |
2496 | is a command that deletes the frame that received the event, and kills | |
2497 | Emacs when the last visible or iconified frame is deleted. You can | |
2498 | rebind the event to some other command if you wish. | |
2499 | ||
2500 | *** Two new types of events, iconify-frame and make-frame-visible, | |
2501 | indicate that the user iconified or deiconified a frame with the | |
2502 | window manager. Since the window manager has already done the work, | |
2503 | the default definition for both event types in Emacs is to do nothing. | |
2504 | ||
2505 | ** Frames and X | |
2506 | ||
2507 | *** Certain Lisp variables are now local to an X terminal (in other | |
2508 | words, all the screens of a single X server). The value in effect, at | |
2509 | any given time, is the one that belongs to the terminal of the | |
2510 | selected frame. The terminal-local variables are | |
2511 | default-minibuffer-frame, system-key-alist, defining-kbd-macro, and | |
2512 | last-kbd-macro. There is no way for Lisp programs to create others. | |
2513 | ||
2514 | The terminal-local variables cannot be buffer-local. | |
2515 | ||
2516 | *** When you create an X frame, for the `top' and `left' frame | |
2517 | parameters, you can now use values of the form (+ N) or (- N), where N | |
2518 | is an integer. (+ N) means N pixels to the right of the left edge of | |
2519 | the screen and (- N) means N pixels to the left of the right edge. In | |
2520 | both cases, N may be zero (exactly at the edge) or negative (putting | |
2521 | the window partly off the screen). | |
2522 | ||
2523 | The function x-parse-geometry can return values of these forms | |
2524 | for certain inputs. | |
2525 | ||
2526 | *** The variable menu-bar-file-menu has been renamed to | |
2527 | menu-bar-files-menu to match the actual item that appears in the menu. | |
2528 | (All the other such variable names do match.) | |
2529 | ||
2530 | *** The new function active-minibuffer-window returns the minibuffer window | |
2531 | currently active, or nil if none is now active. | |
2532 | ||
2533 | *** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame, | |
2534 | previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window | |
2535 | and delete-windows-on, if you specify 0 for the last argument, | |
2536 | it means to consider all visible and iconified frames. | |
2537 | ||
2538 | *** When you set a frame's cursor type with modify-frame-parameters, | |
2539 | you can now specify (bar . INTEGER) as the cursor type. This stands | |
2540 | for a bar cursor of width INTEGER. | |
2541 | ||
2542 | *** The new function facep returns t if its argument is a face name | |
2543 | (or if it is a vector such as is used internally by the Lisp code | |
2544 | to represent a face). | |
2545 | ||
2546 | *** Each frame can now have a buffer-predicate function, | |
2547 | which is the `buffer-predicate' frame parameter. | |
2548 | When `other-buffer' looks for an alternative buffer, it considers | |
2549 | only the buffers that fit the selected frame's buffer predicate (if it | |
2550 | has one). This is useful for applications that make their own frames. | |
2551 | ||
2552 | *** When you create an X frame, you can now specify the frame parameter | |
2553 | `display'. This says which display to put the frame on. The value | |
2554 | should be a display name--a string of the form | |
2555 | "HOST:DPYNUMBER.SCREENNUMBER". | |
2556 | ||
2557 | The functions x-server-... and x-display-... now take an optional | |
2558 | argument which specifies the display to ask about. You can use either | |
2559 | a display name string or a frame. A value of nil stands for the | |
2560 | selected frame. | |
2561 | ||
2562 | To close the connection to an X display, use the function | |
2563 | x-close-connection. Specify which display with a display name. You | |
2564 | cannot close the connection if Emacs still has frames open on that | |
2565 | display. | |
2566 | ||
2567 | x-display-list returns a list indicating which displays Emacs has | |
2568 | connections to. Its elements are display names (strings). | |
2569 | ||
2570 | *** The icon-type frame parameter may now be a file name. | |
2571 | Then the contents of that file specify the icon bitmap to use | |
2572 | for that frame. | |
2573 | ||
2574 | *** The title of an Emacs frame, displayed by most window managers, is | |
2575 | set from frame-title-format or icon-title-format. These have the same | |
2576 | structure as mode-line-format. | |
2577 | ||
2578 | *** x-display-grayscale-p is a new function that returns non-nil if | |
2579 | your X server can display shades of gray. Currently it returns | |
2580 | non-nil for color displays (because they can display shades of gray); | |
2581 | we may change it in the next version to return nil for color displays. | |
2582 | ||
2583 | *** The frame parameter scroll-bar-width specifies the width of the | |
2584 | scrollbar in pixels. | |
2585 | ||
2586 | ** Buffers | |
2587 | ||
2588 | *** Creating a buffer with get-buffer-create does not obey | |
2589 | default-major-mode. That variable is now handled in a separate | |
2590 | function, set-buffer-major-mode. get-buffer-create and generate-new-buffer | |
2591 | always leave the newly created buffer in Fundamental mode. | |
2592 | ||
2593 | Creating a new buffer by visiting a file or with switch-to-buffer, | |
2594 | pop-to-buffer, and similar functions does call set-buffer-major-mode | |
2595 | to select the default major mode specified with default-major-mode. | |
2596 | ||
2597 | *** You can now create an "indirect buffer". An indirect buffer shares | |
2598 | its text, including text properties, with another buffer (the "base | |
2599 | buffer"), but has its own major mode, local variables, overlays, and | |
2600 | narrowing. An indirect buffer has a name of its own, distinct from | |
2601 | those of the base buffer and all other buffers. An indirect buffer | |
2602 | cannot itself be visiting a file (though its base buffer can be). | |
2603 | The base buffer cannot itself be indirect. | |
2604 | ||
2605 | Use (make-indirect-buffer BASE-BUFFER NAME) to make an indirect buffer | |
2606 | named NAME whose base is BASE-BUFFER. If BASE-BUFFER is an indirect | |
2607 | buffer, its base buffer is used as the base for the new buffer. | |
2608 | ||
2609 | You can make an indirect buffer current, or switch to it in a window, | |
2610 | just as you would a non-indirect buffer. | |
2611 | ||
2612 | The function buffer-base-buffer, given an indirect buffer, returns its | |
2613 | base buffer. It returns nil when given an ordinary buffer (not | |
2614 | indirect). | |
2615 | ||
2616 | The library `noutline' has versions of Outline mode and Outline minor | |
2617 | mode which let you display different parts of the outline in different | |
2618 | indirect buffers. | |
2619 | ||
2620 | ** Subprocesses | |
2621 | ||
2622 | *** The functions call-process and call-process-region now allow | |
2623 | you to direct error message output from the subprocess into a | |
2624 | separate destination, instead of mixing it with ordinary output. | |
2625 | To do this, specify for the third argument, BUFFER, a list of the form | |
2626 | (BUFFER-OR-NAME ERROR-DESTINATION) | |
2627 | BUFFER-OR-NAME specifies where to put ordinary output; it should | |
2628 | be a buffer or buffer name, or t, nil or 0. This is what would | |
2629 | have been the BUFFER argument, ordinarily. | |
2630 | ||
2631 | ERROR-DESTINATION specifies where to put the error output. | |
2632 | nil means discard it, t means mix it with the ordinary output, | |
2633 | and a string specifies a file name to write this output into. | |
2634 | ||
2635 | You can't specify a buffer to put the error output in; that is not | |
2636 | easy to implement directly. You can put the error output into a | |
2637 | buffer by sending it to a temporary file and then inserting the file | |
2638 | into a buffer. | |
2639 | ||
2640 | *** Comint mode changes: | |
2641 | ||
2642 | **** The variable comint-completion-addsuffix can also be a cons pair | |
2643 | of the form (DIRSUFFIX . FILESUFFIX), where DIRSUFFIX and FILESUFFIX are | |
2644 | strings added on unambiguous or exact completion of directories and file | |
2645 | names, respectively. | |
2646 | ||
2647 | ** Text properties | |
2648 | ||
2649 | *** You can now specify which values of the `invisible' property | |
2650 | make text invisible in a given buffer. The variable | |
2651 | `buffer-invisibility-spec', which is always local in all buffers, | |
2652 | controls this. | |
2653 | ||
2654 | If its value is t, then any non-nil `invisible' property makes | |
2655 | a character invisible. | |
2656 | ||
2657 | If its value is a list, then a character is invisible if its | |
2658 | `invisible' property value appears as a member of the list, or if it | |
2659 | appears as the car of a member of the list. | |
2660 | ||
2661 | When the `invisible' property value appears as the car of a member of | |
2662 | the `buffer-invisibility-spec' list, then the cdr of that member has | |
2663 | an effect. If it is non-nil, then an ellipsis appears in place of the | |
2664 | character. (This happens only for the *last* invisible character in a | |
2665 | series of consecutive invisible characters, and only at the end of a | |
2666 | line.) | |
2667 | ||
2668 | If a character's `invisible' property is a list, then Emacs checks each | |
2669 | element of the list against `buffer-invisibility-spec'. If any element | |
2670 | matches, the character is invisible. | |
2671 | ||
2672 | *** The command `list-text-properties-at' shows what text properties | |
2673 | are in effect at point. | |
2674 | ||
2675 | *** Frame objects now exist in Emacs even on systems that don't support | |
2676 | X Windows. You can create multiple frames, and switch between them | |
2677 | using select-frame. The selected frame is actually displayed on your | |
2678 | terminal; other frames are not displayed at all. The selected frame | |
2679 | number appears in the mode line after `Emacs', except for frame 1. | |
2680 | ||
2681 | Switching frames on ASCII terminals is therefore more or less | |
2682 | equivalent to switching between different window configurations. | |
2683 | ||
2684 | *** The new variable window-size-change-functions holds a list of | |
2685 | functions to be called if window sizes change (or if windows are | |
2686 | created or deleted). The functions are called once for each frame on | |
2687 | which changes have occurred, with the frame as the sole argument. | |
2688 | This takes place shortly before redisplay. | |
2689 | ||
2690 | *** The modification hook functions of overlays now work differently. | |
2691 | They are called both before and after each change. This makes it | |
2692 | possible for the functions to determine exactly what the change was. | |
2693 | ||
2694 | This change affects three overlay properties: the modification-hooks | |
2695 | property, a list of functions called for deletions overlapping the | |
2696 | overlay's range and for insertions inside it; the | |
2697 | insert-in-front-hooks, a list of functions called for insertions at | |
2698 | the beginning of the overlay; and the insert-behind-hooks, a list of | |
2699 | functions called for insertions at the end of the overlay. | |
2700 | ||
2701 | Each function is called both before and after each change that it | |
2702 | applies to. Before the change, it is called with four arguments: | |
2703 | (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY nil START END) | |
2704 | START and END are the same arguments that the before-change-functions | |
2705 | receive. | |
2706 | ||
2707 | After the change, each function is called with five arguments: | |
2708 | (funcall FUNCTION OVERLAY t START END OLDSIZE) | |
2709 | The last arguments, START and END and OLDSIZE, | |
2710 | are the same arguments that the after-change-functions receive. | |
2711 | ||
2712 | This means the function must accept either four or five arguments. | |
2713 | ||
2714 | *** You can set defaults for text-properties with the new variable | |
2715 | `default-text-properties'. Its value is a property list; the values | |
2716 | specified there are used whenever a character (or its category) does | |
2717 | not specify a value. | |
2718 | ||
2719 | *** The `face' property of a character or an overlay can now be a list | |
2720 | of face names. Formerly it had to be just one face name. | |
2721 | ||
2722 | *** Changes in handling the `intangible' text property. | |
2723 | ||
2724 | **** If inhibit-point-motion-hooks is non-nil, then `intangible' properties | |
2725 | are ignored. | |
2726 | ||
2727 | **** Moving to just before a stretch of intangible text | |
2728 | is no longer special in any way. Point stays at that place. | |
2729 | ||
2730 | **** When you move point backwards into the midst of intangible text, | |
2731 | point moves back to the beginning of that text. (It used to move | |
2732 | forward to the end of that text, which was not very useful.) | |
2733 | ||
2734 | **** When moving across intangible text, Emacs stops wherever the | |
2735 | property value changes. So if you have two stretches of intangible | |
2736 | text, with different non-nil intangible properties, it is possible to | |
2737 | place point between them. | |
2738 | ||
2739 | ** Overlays | |
2740 | ||
2741 | *** Overlay changes. | |
2742 | ||
2743 | **** The new function previous-overlay-change returns the position of | |
2744 | the previous overlay start or end, before a specified position. This | |
2745 | is the backwards-moving counterpart of next-overlay-change. | |
2746 | ||
2747 | **** overlay-get now supports category properties on an overlay | |
2748 | the same way get-text-property supports them as text properties. | |
2749 | ||
2750 | Specifically, if an overlay does not have the property PROP that you | |
2751 | ask for, but it does have a `category' property which is a symbol, | |
2752 | then that symbol's PROP property is used. | |
2753 | ||
2754 | **** If an overlay has a non-nil `evaporate' property, it will be | |
2755 | deleted if it ever becomes empty (i.e., when it spans no characters). | |
2756 | ||
2757 | **** If an overlay has a `before-string' and/or `after-string' property, | |
2758 | these strings are displayed at the overlay's endpoints. | |
2759 | ||
2760 | ** Filling | |
2761 | ||
2762 | *** The new variable fill-paragraph-function provides a way for major | |
2763 | modes to override the filling of paragraphs. If this is non-nil, | |
2764 | fill-paragraph calls it as a function, passing along its sole | |
2765 | argument. If the function returns non-nil, fill-paragraph assumes it | |
2766 | has done the job and simply passes on whatever value it returned. | |
2767 | ||
2768 | The usual use of this feature is to fill comments in programming | |
2769 | language modes. | |
2770 | ||
2771 | *** Text filling and justification changes: | |
2772 | ||
2773 | **** The new variable use-hard-newlines can be used to make a | |
2774 | distinction between "hard" and "soft" newlines; the fill functions | |
2775 | will then never remove a newline that was manually inserted. Hard | |
2776 | newlines are marked with a non-nil `hard' text-property. | |
2777 | ||
2778 | **** The fill-column and left-margin can now be modified by text-properties. | |
2779 | Most lisp programs should use the new functions (current-fill-column) and | |
2780 | (current-left-margin), which return the proper values to use for the | |
2781 | current line. | |
2782 | ||
177c0ea7 | 2783 | **** There are new functions for dealing with margins: |
a933dad1 DL |
2784 | |
2785 | ***** Set-left-margin and set-right-margin (set the value for a region | |
2786 | and re-fill). These functions take three arguments: two to specify | |
2787 | a region, and the desired margin value. | |
2788 | ||
2789 | ***** Increase-left-margin, decrease-left-margin, increase-right-margin, and | |
2790 | decrease-right-margin (change settings relative to current values, and | |
2791 | re-fill). | |
2792 | ||
2793 | ***** move-to-left-margin moves point there, optionally adding | |
2794 | indentation or changing tabs to spaces in order to make that possible. | |
2795 | beginning-of-line-text also moves past the fill-prefix and any | |
2796 | indentation added to center or right-justify a line, to the beginning | |
2797 | of the text that the user actually typed. | |
2798 | ||
2799 | ***** delete-to-left-margin removes any left-margin indentation, but | |
2800 | does not change the property. | |
2801 | ||
2802 | **** The paragraph-movement functions look for the paragraph-start and | |
2803 | paragraph-separate regexps at the current left margin, not at the | |
2804 | beginning of the line. This means that those regexps should NOT use ^ | |
2805 | to anchor the search. However, for backwards compatibility, a ^ at | |
2806 | the beginning of the regexp will be ignored, so most packages won't break. | |
2807 | ||
2808 | **** justify-current-line is now capable of doing left, center, or | |
2809 | right justification as well as full justification. | |
2810 | ||
2811 | **** The fill functions can do any kind of justification based on the new | |
2812 | `justification' text-property and `default-justification' variable, | |
2813 | or arguments to the functions. They also have a new option which | |
2814 | defeats the normal removal of extra whitespace. | |
2815 | ||
2816 | **** The new function `current-justification' returns the kind of | |
2817 | justification used for the current line. The new function | |
2818 | `set-justification' can be used to change it, including re-justifying | |
2819 | the text of the region according to the new value. | |
2820 | ||
2821 | **** Filling and auto-fill are disabled if justification is `none'. | |
2822 | ||
177c0ea7 | 2823 | **** The auto-fill-function is now called regardless of whether |
a933dad1 DL |
2824 | the fill-column has been exceeded; the function can determine on its |
2825 | own whether filling (or justification) is necessary. | |
2826 | ||
2827 | ** Processes | |
2828 | ||
2829 | *** process-tty-name is a new function that returns the name of the | |
2830 | terminal that the process itself reads and writes on (not the name of | |
2831 | the pty that Emacs uses to talk with that terminal). | |
2832 | ||
2833 | *** Errors in process filters and sentinels are now normally caught | |
2834 | automatically, so that they don't abort other Lisp programs. | |
2835 | ||
2836 | Setting debug-on-error non-nil turns off this feature; then errors in | |
2837 | filters and sentinels are not caught. As a result, they can invoke | |
2838 | the debugger, under the control of debug-on-error. | |
2839 | ||
2840 | *** Emacs now preserves the match data around the execution of process | |
2841 | filters and sentinels. You can use search and match functions freely | |
2842 | in filters and sentinels without explicitly bothering to save the | |
2843 | match data. | |
2844 | ||
2845 | ** Display | |
2846 | ||
2847 | *** The variable message-log-max controls how messages are logged in the | |
2848 | "*Messages*" buffer. An integer value means to keep that many lines; | |
2849 | t means to log with no limit; nil means disable message logging. Lisp | |
2850 | code that calls `message' excessively (e.g. isearch.el) should probably | |
2851 | bind this variable to nil. | |
2852 | ||
2853 | *** Display tables now have a new element, at index 261, specifying the | |
2854 | glyph to use for the separator between two side-by-side windows. By | |
2855 | default, this is the vertical bar character `|'. Probably the only | |
2856 | other useful character to store for this element is a space, to make | |
2857 | less visual separation between two side-by-side windows displaying | |
2858 | related information. | |
2859 | ||
2860 | *** The new mode-line-format spec %c displays the current column number. | |
2861 | ||
2862 | *** The new variable blink-matching-delay specifies how long to keep | |
2863 | the cursor at the matching open-paren, after you insert a close-paren. | |
2864 | This is useful mainly on systems which can wait for a fraction of a | |
2865 | second--you can then specify fractional values such as 0.5. | |
2866 | ||
2867 | *** Faster processing of buffers with long lines | |
2868 | ||
2869 | The new variable cache-long-line-scans determines whether Emacs | |
2870 | should use caches to handle long lines more quickly. This variable is | |
2871 | buffer-local, in all buffers. | |
2872 | ||
2873 | Normally, the line-motion functions work by scanning the buffer for | |
2874 | newlines. Columnar operations (like `move-to-column' and | |
2875 | `compute-motion') also work by scanning the buffer, summing character | |
2876 | widths as they go. This works well for ordinary text, but if the | |
2877 | buffer's lines are very long (say, more than 500 characters), these | |
2878 | motion functions will take longer to execute. Emacs may also take | |
2879 | longer to update the display. | |
2880 | ||
2881 | If cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, these motion functions cache | |
2882 | the results of their scans, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning | |
2883 | regions of the buffer until the text is modified. The caches are most | |
2884 | beneficial when they prevent the most searching---that is, when the | |
2885 | buffer contains long lines and large regions of characters with the | |
2886 | same, fixed screen width. | |
2887 | ||
2888 | When cache-long-line-scans is non-nil, processing short lines will | |
2889 | become slightly slower (because of the overhead of consulting the | |
2890 | cache), and the caches will use memory roughly proportional to the | |
2891 | number of newlines and characters whose screen width varies. | |
2892 | ||
2893 | The caches require no explicit maintenance; their accuracy is | |
2894 | maintained internally by the Emacs primitives. Enabling or disabling | |
2895 | the cache should not affect the behavior of any of the motion functions; | |
2896 | it should only affect their performance. | |
2897 | ||
2898 | ** System Interface | |
2899 | ||
2900 | *** The function user-login-name now accepts an optional | |
2901 | argument uid. If the argument is non-nil, user-login-name | |
2902 | returns the login name for that user id. | |
2903 | ||
2904 | *** system-name, user-name, user-full-name and user-real-name are now | |
2905 | variables as well as functions. The variables hold the same values | |
2906 | that the functions would return. The new variable multiple-frames | |
2907 | is non-nil if at least two non-minibuffer frames are visible. These | |
2908 | variables may be useful in constructing the value of frame-title-format | |
2909 | or icon-title-format. | |
2910 | ||
2911 | *** Changes in time-conversion functions. | |
2912 | ||
2913 | **** The new function format-time-string takes a format string and a | |
2914 | time value. It converts the time to a string, according to the format | |
2915 | specified. You can specify what kind of conversion to use with | |
2916 | %-specifications. | |
2917 | ||
2918 | **** The new function decode-time converts a time value into a list of | |
2919 | specific items of information: the year, month, day of week, day of | |
2920 | month, hour, minute and second. (A time value is a list of two or | |
2921 | three integers.) | |
2922 | ||
2923 | **** The new function encode-time converts specific items of time | |
2924 | information--the second, minute, hour, day, month, year, and time | |
2925 | zone--into a time value. | |
9a21d88b KS |
2926 | |
2927 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2928 | \f |
2929 | * Changes in Emacs 19.27 | |
2930 | ||
2931 | There are no changes; however, here is one bug fix made in 19.26 that users | |
2932 | think should be documented here. | |
2933 | ||
2934 | ** SPC and DEL in Info now handle menus consistently. | |
2935 | ||
2936 | SPC and DEL scroll through an entire subtree an Info manual. Once you | |
2937 | scroll through a node far enough to reach a menu, SPC begins moving | |
2938 | into the subnodes of the menu, starting with the first one. When you | |
2939 | reach the end of a subnode, SPC moves into the next subnode, and so | |
2940 | on. | |
2941 | ||
2942 | DEL more or less scrolls through the same text in reverse order. | |
9a21d88b KS |
2943 | |
2944 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
2945 | \f |
2946 | * User Editing Changes in Emacs 19.26 | |
2947 | ||
2948 | ** In the X toolkit version, if you click on a menu bar item and | |
2949 | release the button quickly outside the menu, the menu remains visible | |
2950 | until you click or type something else. If you click on the menu, you | |
2951 | select from the menu. Any other mouse click makes the menu disappear. | |
2952 | Keyboard input gets rid of the menu and then is processed normally. | |
2953 | ||
2954 | "Quickly" means within double-click-time milliseconds. | |
2955 | ||
2956 | ** The C-x 5 commands to select a buffer in "another frame" now use an | |
2957 | existing iconified frame, if any, deiconifying it. They also raise | |
2958 | the frame. | |
2959 | ||
2960 | ** Region highlighting on a black-and-white-only display now uses | |
2961 | underlining. Inverse-video had the problem that you couldn't see | |
2962 | the cursor. | |
2963 | ||
2964 | ** You can now change the height of a window by pressing mouse-1 on | |
2965 | the mode line and dragging it up and down. | |
2966 | ||
2967 | ** If you set the environment variable LC_CTYPE to iso_8859_1 or | |
2968 | iso-8859-1, Emacs automatically sets up for display and syntactic | |
2969 | handling of the ISO Latin-1 character set. | |
2970 | ||
2971 | This does not automatically load any of the packages for input of | |
2972 | these characters, because it's not yet clear what is right to do. | |
2973 | You must still explicitly load either iso-transl or iso-acc. | |
2974 | ||
2975 | ** For a read-only buffer that is also modified, the mode line now displays | |
2976 | %* instead of %%. | |
2977 | ||
2978 | ** M-prior (scroll-other-window-down) is a new command that works like | |
2979 | M-next (and C-M-v) but scrolls in the opposite direction. | |
2980 | ||
2981 | M-home moves to the beginning of the buffer, in the other window. | |
2982 | M-end moves to the end of the buffer, in the other window. These two | |
2983 | commands, along with M-next and M-prior, form a series of commands for | |
2984 | moving around in the other window. | |
2985 | ||
2986 | ** In change logs, the mail address is now delimited with <...> instead | |
2987 | of (...). | |
2988 | ||
2989 | This makes it a little more convenient to extract the mail address for | |
2990 | use in mailing a message. | |
2991 | ||
2992 | ** In Shell mode and other comint modes, C-a has now returned to | |
2993 | its ordinary meaning: move to the beginning of the line. | |
2994 | Use C-c C-a to move to the end of the prompt. | |
2995 | ||
2996 | ** If you set mail-signature to t to cause automatic insertion of | |
2997 | your .signature file, you now get a -- before the signature. | |
2998 | ||
2999 | ** Setting rmail-highlighted-headers to nil entirely turns off | |
3000 | highlighting in Rmail. However, if your motivation for doing this is | |
3001 | that the highlighted text doesn't look good on your display, it might | |
3002 | be better to change the appearance of the `highlight' face. Once | |
3003 | you've done that, you may find Rmail highlighting is useful. | |
3004 | ||
3005 | ** In the calendar, mouse-2 is now used only for commands that apply to a date. | |
3006 | If you click it when not on a date, it gives an immediate error. | |
3007 | ||
3008 | Mouse-3 in the calendar now gives a menu of commands that do not apply | |
3009 | to a particular date. | |
3010 | ||
3011 | The D command displays diary entries from a specified diary file (not | |
3012 | your standard diary file). | |
3013 | ||
3014 | ** In the gnus-uu package, the binding for gnus-uu-threaded-decode-and-view | |
3015 | is now C-c C-v C-d, not C-c C-v C-h. Thus, C-c C-v C-h is now available | |
3016 | for asking for a list of the subcommands of C-c C-v. | |
3017 | ||
3018 | ** You can now specify "who you are" for various Emacs packages by | |
3019 | setting just one variable, user-mail-address. This currently applies | |
3020 | to posting news with GNUS and to making change log entries. It may | |
3021 | apply to additional Emacs features in the future. | |
9a21d88b | 3022 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3023 | \f |
3024 | * Lisp-Level Changes in Emacs 19.26: | |
3025 | ||
3026 | ** The function insert-char now takes an optional third argument | |
3027 | which, if non-nil, says the inserted characters should inherit sticky | |
3028 | text properties from the surrounding text. | |
3029 | ||
3030 | ** The `diary' library has been renamed to `diary-lib'. If you refer | |
3031 | to this library in your Lisp code, you must update the references. | |
3032 | ||
3033 | ** Sending text to a subprocess can read input from subprocesses if it | |
3034 | has to wait because the destination subprocess's terminal input buffer | |
3035 | is full. | |
3036 | ||
3037 | It was already possible in unusual occasions for this operation to | |
3038 | read subprocess input, but it did not happen very often. It is now | |
3039 | more likely to happen. | |
3040 | ||
3041 | ** last-nonmenu-event is now bound to t around filter functions and sentinels. | |
3042 | This is to ensure that y-or-n-p and yes-or-no-p use the keyboard by default. | |
3043 | ||
3044 | ** In mode lines, %+ now displays as % for unmodified read-only | |
3045 | buffers. It is now the same as %* except in the case of a modified | |
3046 | read-only buffer; in that case, %+ displays as *. | |
3047 | ||
3048 | The old meaning of %+ is now available on %&. | |
3049 | It displays * for a modified buffer and - for an unmodified buffer, | |
3050 | regardless of read-only status. | |
3051 | ||
3052 | ** You can now use `underline' in the color list of a face. | |
3053 | It serves as a last resort, and says to underline the face | |
3054 | (if previous color list elements can't be used). | |
3055 | ||
3056 | ** The new function x-color-values returns the list of color values | |
3057 | for a given color name (a string). The list contains three integers | |
3058 | which give the amounts of red, green and blue in the color: (R G B). | |
3059 | ||
3060 | ** In run-at-time, 0 as the repeat interval means "don't repeat". | |
3061 | ||
3062 | ** The variable trim-versions-without-asking has been renamed to | |
3063 | delete-old-versions. | |
3064 | ||
3065 | ** The new function other-window-for-scrolling returns the choice of | |
3066 | other window for C-M-v to scroll. | |
3067 | ||
3068 | ** Note that the function fceiling was mistakenly documented as fceil before. | |
9a21d88b | 3069 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3070 | \f |
3071 | * Changes in cc-mode.el in Emacs 19.26: | |
3072 | ||
3073 | ** A new syntactic symbol has been added: substatement-open. It | |
3074 | defines the open brace of a substatement block. These used to get: | |
3075 | ((block-open ...) (substatement . ...)). | |
3076 | ||
3077 | Non-block substatement lines still get just ((substatement . ...)) | |
3078 | ||
3079 | Note that the custom indent function c-adaptive-block-open has been | |
3080 | removed as obsolete. | |
3081 | ||
3082 | ** You can now specify the `hanginess' of closing braces. See | |
3083 | c-hanging-braces-alist. | |
3084 | ||
3085 | ** Recognizes try and catch blocks in C++. They are given the | |
3086 | substatement syntactic symbol. | |
3087 | ||
3088 | ** should be generally more forgiving about non-GNU standard top-level | |
3089 | construct definition styles (i.e. where the function/class/struct | |
3090 | opening brace does not start in column zero). | |
3091 | ||
3092 | If you hang the braces that open a top-level construct on the right | |
3093 | edge, and you find you still need to define defun-open-prompt (Emacs | |
3094 | 19) please let me know. Note that there may still be performance | |
3095 | issues related to non-column zero opening braces. | |
3096 | ||
3097 | ** c-macro-expand is put on C-c C-e | |
3098 | ||
3099 | ** New style: "Default". Resets indentation to those shipped with | |
3100 | cc-mode.el. | |
3101 | ||
3102 | ** internal defun c-indent-via-language-element has been renamed | |
3103 | c-indent-line for compatibility with c-mode.el and awk-mode. | |
3104 | ||
3105 | ** new buffer-local variable c-comment-start-regexp for (potential) | |
3106 | flexibility in adding new modes based on cc-mode.el | |
9a21d88b KS |
3107 | |
3108 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3109 | \f |
3110 | * Changes in Emacs 19.25 | |
3111 | ||
3112 | The variable x-cross-pointer-shape (which didn't really exist) has | |
3113 | been renamed to x-sensitive-text-pointer-shape, and now does exist. | |
9a21d88b KS |
3114 | |
3115 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3116 | \f |
3117 | * Changes in Emacs 19.24 | |
3118 | ||
3119 | Here is a list of new Lisp packages introduced since 19.22. | |
3120 | ||
3121 | derived.el Define new major modes based on old ones. | |
3122 | dired-x.el Extra Dired features. | |
3123 | double.el New mode for conveniently inputting non-beyond chars. | |
3124 | easymenu.el Create menus easily. | |
3125 | ediff.el Snazzy diff interface. | |
3126 | foldout.el A kind of outline mode designed for editing programs. | |
3127 | gnus-uu.el UUdecode in GNUS buffers. | |
3128 | ielm.el Interactively evaluate Lisp. | |
3129 | This is a replacement for Lisp Interaction Mode. | |
3130 | iso-cvt.el Conversion of beyond-ASCII characters between | |
3131 | various different representations. | |
3132 | jka-compr.el Automatic compression/decompression. | |
3133 | mldrag.el Drag modeline to change heights of windows. | |
3134 | mail-hist.el Provides history for headers of outgoing mail. | |
3135 | rsz-mini.el Automatically resizing minibuffers. | |
3136 | s-region.el Set region by holding shift. | |
3137 | skeleton.el Templates for statement insertion. | |
3138 | soundex.el Classifying words by how they sound. | |
3139 | tempo.el Template insertion with hotspots. | |
9a21d88b KS |
3140 | |
3141 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
3142 | \f |
3143 | * User Editing Changes in 19.23. | |
3144 | ||
3145 | ** Emacs 19.23 uses Ispell version 3. | |
3146 | ||
3147 | Previous Emacs 19 versions used Ispell version 4. That version had | |
3148 | improvements in storing the dictionary compactly, but these are not | |
3149 | very important nowadays. Meanwhile, in parallel to the work on Ispell | |
3150 | 4, many useful features were added to Ispell 3. Until a few months | |
3151 | ago, the terms on Ispell 3 did not let us use it; but they have now | |
3152 | been changed, so now we are using it. We are dropping Ispell 4. | |
3153 | ||
3154 | ** Emacs 19.23 can run on MS-DOG. See the file MSDOS in the same | |
3155 | directory as this file. | |
3156 | ||
3157 | ** Emacs 19.23 can work with an X toolkit. You must specify toolkit | |
3158 | operation when you configure Emacs: use the option | |
3159 | --with-x-toolkit=yes. (This option uses code developed by Lucid; | |
3160 | thanks to Frederic Pierresteguy for helping to adapt it.) | |
3161 | ||
3162 | ** Emacs now has dialog boxes; yes/no and y/n questions automatically | |
3163 | use them in commands invoked with the mouse. For more information, | |
3164 | see below under "Lisp programming changes". | |
3165 | ||
3166 | ** Menus now display the keyboard equivalents (if any) of the menu | |
3167 | commands in parentheses after the menu item. | |
3168 | ||
3169 | ** Kill commands, used in a read-only buffer, now move point across | |
3170 | the text they would otherwise have killed. This way, you can use | |
3171 | repeated kill commands to transfer text into the kill ring. | |
3172 | ||
3173 | ** There is now a global mark ring in addition to the mark ring that is local | |
3174 | to each buffer. The global mark ring stores positions in any buffer. Any | |
3175 | time the mark is set and the current buffer is different from the last time | |
3176 | the mark was set, the new mark is pushed on the global mark ring as well. | |
3177 | The new command C-x C-SPC (pop-global-mark) pops the global mark ring and | |
3178 | jumps to the last mark pushed, first switching to that buffer. | |
3179 | ||
3180 | ** Query Replace is now available in the Edit menu. | |
3181 | ||
3182 | ** ESC no longer simply exits a Query Replace. It now exits the Query | |
3183 | Replace and remains pending. Thus, ESC A and M-A are now equivalent | |
3184 | in Query Replace. | |
3185 | ||
3186 | To simply exit a Query Replace, type RET or Period. | |
3187 | ||
3188 | ** M-mouse-2 now puts point at the end of the yanked secondary selection. | |
3189 | ||
3190 | ** Mouse-1 in the mode line now simply selects the window above that | |
3191 | mode line. Mouse-2 in the mode line selects that window and expands | |
3192 | it to fill the frame it is in. | |
3193 | ||
3194 | ** You can now use mouse-2 in a Dired buffer or Tar mode buffer to find | |
3195 | a file you click on, in a compilation buffer to go to a particular | |
3196 | error message, and in a *Occur* buffer to go to a particular | |
3197 | occurrence. | |
3198 | ||
3199 | (It was already possible to do likewise in Info and in completion list | |
3200 | buffers.) | |
3201 | ||
3202 | What's more, the sensitive areas of the buffer now highlight when you | |
3203 | move the mouse over them. | |
3204 | ||
3205 | ** In a completion list buffer, the command RET now chooses the completion | |
3206 | that is around or next to point. | |
3207 | ||
3208 | ** If you specify the foreground color for the `mode-line' face, and | |
3209 | mode-line-inverse-video is non-nil, then the default background color | |
3210 | is the usual foreground color. | |
3211 | ||
3212 | ** revert-buffer now preserves markers pointing within the unchanged | |
3213 | text (if any) at the beginning and end of the file. | |
3214 | ||
3215 | ** Version control checkin and checkout preserve all markers if the | |
3216 | file does not contain any of the magic version header sequences that | |
3217 | are updated automatically by RCS and SCCS. If such version headers | |
3218 | are present, checkin and checkout preserve a marker unless it comes | |
3219 | between two such sequences. (So it's a good idea to put all the | |
3220 | header sequences close together.) | |
3221 | ||
3222 | ** When a large deletion shuts off auto save temporarily in a buffer, | |
3223 | you can now turn it on again by saving the buffer with C-x C-s (as was | |
3224 | possible in Emacs 18). You can also turn it on again with M-1 M-x | |
3225 | auto-save (as has been possible in Emacs 19). | |
3226 | ||
3227 | ** C-x r d now runs the command delete-rectangle. | |
3228 | ||
3229 | ** The new command imenu shows you a menu of interesting places in the | |
3230 | current buffer and lets you select one; then it moves point there. | |
3231 | The definition of interesting places depends on the major mode, but | |
3232 | typically this includes function definitions and such. Normally, | |
3233 | imenu displays the menu in a buffer; but if you bind it to a mouse | |
3234 | event, it shows a mouse popup menu. | |
3235 | ||
3236 | ** You can make certain chosen buffers, that normally appear in a | |
3237 | separate window, appear in special frames of their own. To do this, | |
3238 | set special-display-buffer-names to a list of buffer names; any buffer | |
3239 | whose name is in that list automatically gets a special frame when it | |
3240 | is to be displayed in another window. | |
3241 | ||
3242 | A good value to try is ("*compilation*" "*grep*" "*TeX Shell*"). | |
3243 | ||
3244 | More generally, you can set special-display-regexps to a list of regular | |
3245 | expressions; then each buffer whose name matches any of those regular | |
3246 | expressions gets its own frame. | |
3247 | ||
3248 | The variable special-display-frame-alist specifies the frame | |
3249 | parameters for these frames. It has a default value, so you don't | |
3250 | need to set it. | |
3251 | ||
3252 | ** If you set sentence-end-double-space to nil, the fill commands | |
3253 | expect just one space at the end of a sentence. (If you want the | |
3254 | sentence commands to accept single spaces, you must modify the regexp | |
3255 | sentence-end also.) | |
3256 | ||
3257 | ** You can suppress the startup echo area message by adding text like | |
3258 | this to your .emacs file: | |
3259 | ||
3260 | (setq inhibit-startup-echo-area-message "YOUR-LOGIN-NAME") | |
3261 | ||
3262 | Simply setting inhibit-startup-echo-area-message to your login name is | |
3263 | not sufficient to inhibit the message; Emacs explicitly checks whether | |
3264 | .emacs contains an expression as shown above. Your login name must | |
3265 | appear in the expression as a Lisp string constant. | |
3266 | ||
3267 | This way, you can easily inhibit the message for yourself if you wish, | |
3268 | but thoughtless copying of your .emacs file will not inhibit the | |
3269 | message for someone else. | |
3270 | ||
3271 | ** Outline minor mode now uses C-c C-o as a prefix instead of just C-c. | |
3272 | ||
3273 | ** In Outline mode, hide-subtree is now C-c C-d. (It was C-c C-h; but | |
3274 | that is now a conventional way to ask for help about C-c commands.) | |
3275 | ||
3276 | ** There are two additional commands in Outline mode. | |
3277 | M-x hide-sublevels | |
3278 | hides all headers except the topmost N levels. | |
3279 | M-x hide-other | |
3280 | hides everything about the body that point is in | |
3281 | plus the headers leading up from there to the top of the tree. | |
3282 | ||
3283 | ** In iso-transl and iso-insert, the sequences for entering A-ring and | |
3284 | the AE ligature are now just A and E (plus the initial C-x 8 or Alt). | |
3285 | You used to have to enter AA or AE, after the C-x 8 prefix of course. | |
3286 | Likewise for lower case a-ring and ae. | |
3287 | ||
3288 | ** iso-transl now defines convenient Alt keys as well as the C-x 8 prefix. | |
3289 | Instead of prefixing a sequence with C-x 8, you can add Alt to the | |
3290 | first character of the sequence. For example, Alt-" a is now a way | |
3291 | to enter an a-umlaut. | |
3292 | ||
3293 | ** CC mode is a greatly improved mode for C and C++. | |
3294 | See the following page. | |
3295 | ||
3296 | ** tcl mode is a new major mode. It provides features for | |
3297 | editing, indenting and running tcl programs. | |
3298 | ||
3299 | ** Compilation minor mode lets you parse error messages in any buffer, | |
3300 | not just a normal compilation output buffer. Type M-x | |
3301 | compilation-minor-mode to enable the minor mode; then C-c C-c jumps to | |
3302 | the source location for the error at point, as in the `*compilation*' | |
3303 | buffer. If you use compilation-minor-mode in an Rlogin buffer, it | |
3304 | automatically accesses remote source files by ftp. | |
3305 | ||
3306 | ** Comint and shell mode changes: | |
3307 | ||
3308 | *** Comint modes (including Shell mode, GUD modes, etc.) now bind | |
3309 | C-M-l to the command comint-show-output. This command scrolls the | |
3310 | buffer to show the last batch of output from the subprogram. | |
3311 | ||
3312 | *** Completion in Comint modes now truly operates on the string before | |
3313 | point, rather than the word that point is within. | |
3314 | ||
3315 | *** Comint mode file name completion ignores those files that end with a | |
3316 | string in the new variable comint-completion-fignore. This variable's | |
3317 | default value is nil. | |
3318 | ||
3319 | *** Shell mode uses the variable shell-completion-fignore to set | |
3320 | comint-completion-fignore. The default value is nil, but some | |
3321 | people prefer ("~" "#" "%"). | |
3322 | ||
177c0ea7 | 3323 | *** The function `comint-watch-for-password-prompt' can be used to |
a933dad1 DL |
3324 | suppress echoing when a subprocess asks for a password. To use it, |
3325 | do this: | |
3326 | ||
3327 | (add-hook 'comint-output-filter-functions | |
3328 | 'comint-watch-for-password-prompt) | |
3329 | ||
3330 | *** You can use M-x shell-strip-ctrl-m to strip ^M characters from | |
3331 | process output. | |
3332 | ||
3333 | *** In Shell mode, TAB now completes environment variables, if possible, | |
3334 | and expands directory references. | |
3335 | ||
3336 | *** You can use M-x comint-run to execute any program of your choice in | |
3337 | a comint mode. Some programs such as shells, rlogin, and debuggers | |
3338 | have their own specialized modes; this command is one way to use | |
3339 | comint to run programs for which no such specialized mode exits. (You | |
3340 | can also run a shell with M-x shell and run the program of your choice | |
3341 | under the shell--but that gives you the specializations of Shell | |
3342 | mode.) | |
3343 | ||
3344 | ** When you run GUD (M-x gdb, M-x dbx, and so on), you can use TAB | |
3345 | to do file name completion in the minibuffer. | |
3346 | ||
3347 | The "Complete" menu includes an item for directory expansion. | |
3348 | ||
3349 | ** GUD working with future versions of GDB will permit TAB for | |
3350 | GDB-style symbol completion. This will work with GDB 4.13. | |
3351 | ||
3352 | ** Rmail no longer gets new mail automatically when you visit an Rmail | |
3353 | file specified by name--not even if it is your primary Rmail file. To | |
3354 | get new mail, type `g'. This feature is an advantage because you now | |
3355 | have a choice of whether to get new mail. (This change actually | |
3356 | occurred in an earlier version, but wasn't listed here then, since it | |
3357 | made the code do what the documentation already said.) | |
3358 | ||
3359 | ** Rmail now highlights certain fields automatically, when you use X | |
3360 | windows. The variable rmail-highlighted-headers controls which | |
3361 | fields. | |
3362 | ||
3363 | ** If you set rmail-summary-window-size to an integer, Rmail uses | |
3364 | a window that many lines high for the summary buffer. | |
3365 | ||
3366 | ** rmail-input-menu is a new command that visits an Rmail file letting | |
3367 | you choose which file with a mouse menu. rmail-output-menu is | |
3368 | similar; it outputs the current message, using a mouse menu to choose | |
3369 | which Rmail file. These commands use the variables | |
3370 | rmail-secondary-file-directory and rmail-secondary-file-regexp. | |
3371 | ||
3372 | ** The mh-e package has been changed substantially. | |
3373 | See the file ./MH-E-NEWS for details. | |
3374 | ||
3375 | ** The calendar and diary have new features. | |
3376 | ||
3377 | The menu bar for the calendar contains most of the calendar commands, | |
3378 | arranged into logical categories. | |
3379 | ||
3380 | Mouse-2 now performs specific-date-related commands when clicked on a | |
3381 | date in the calendar window and common three-month-related commands | |
3382 | when clicked elsewhere in the calendar window. | |
3383 | ||
3384 | You can set up colored/shaded highlighting of holidays, diary entry | |
3385 | dates, and today's date, by setting calendar-holiday-marker, | |
3386 | diary-entry-marker, and calendar-today-marker to a face instead of a | |
3387 | character. Using a special face is now the default if you are using a | |
3388 | window system. | |
3389 | ||
3390 | ** The appt package for displaying appointment reminders has new | |
3391 | features. | |
3392 | ||
3393 | *** The appt alarm window stays for the full duration of | |
3394 | appt-display-duration. It no longer disappears when you start typing | |
3395 | text. | |
3396 | ||
3397 | *** You can change the way the appointment window is created/deleted by | |
3398 | setting the variables appt-disp-window-function and | |
3399 | appt-delete-window-function. | |
3400 | ||
3401 | For instance, these variables can be set to functions that display | |
3402 | appointments in pop-up frames, which are lowered or iconified after | |
3403 | appt-display-duration seconds. | |
3404 | ||
3405 | ** desktop.el can now save a list of buffer-local variables, | |
3406 | and saves more global ones. | |
3407 | ||
3408 | ** Pascal mode has been completely rewritten. It now features | |
3409 | completing of function names, variables and type definitions around | |
3410 | current point (like M-TAB does with lisp-symbols). There's also an | |
3411 | outline mode (M-x pascal-outline) that hides the bodies of all | |
3412 | functions you're not working with. | |
3413 | ||
3414 | ** Edebug has a number of changes: | |
3415 | ||
3416 | *** Edebug syntax error reporting is improved. | |
3417 | ||
3418 | *** Top-level forms and defining forms other than defun and defmacro may | |
3419 | now be debugged with Edebug. | |
3420 | ||
3421 | *** Edebug specifications may now contain body, &define, name, arg or | |
3422 | arglist, def-body, and def-form, to support definitions. | |
3423 | ||
3424 | *** edebug-all-defuns is renamed to edebug-all-defs. | |
3425 | def-edebug-form-spec is replaced by def-edebug-form whose arguments | |
3426 | are unevaluated. The old names are still available for now. | |
3427 | ||
3428 | *** Frequency counts and coverage data may be displayed for functions being | |
3429 | debugged. | |
3430 | ||
3431 | *** A global break condition is now checked at every stop point. | |
3432 | ||
3433 | *** The previous condition at a breakpoint may now be edited. | |
3434 | ||
3435 | *** A new "next" mode stops only after expression evaluation. | |
3436 | ||
3437 | *** A new command, top-level-nonstop, does not even stop for unwind-protect, | |
3438 | as top-level would. | |
9a21d88b | 3439 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3440 | \f |
3441 | * Changes in CC mode in Emacs 19.23. | |
3442 | ||
3443 | `cc-mode' provides ANSI C, K&R C, and ARM C++ language editing. It | |
3444 | represents the merge of c++-mode.el and c-mode.el. cc-mode provides a | |
3445 | new, more flexible indentation engine so that indentation | |
3446 | customization is more intuitive. There are two steps to calculating | |
3447 | indentation: first, CC mode analyzes the line for syntactic content, | |
3448 | then based on this content it applies user defined offsets and adds | |
3449 | this offset to the indentation of some previous line. | |
3450 | ||
3451 | The syntactic analysis determines if the line describes a `statement', | |
3452 | `substatement', `class-open', `member-init-intro', etc. These are | |
3453 | described in detail with C-h v c-offsets-alist. You can change the | |
3454 | offsets interactively with C-c C-o (c-set-offsets), or | |
3455 | programmatically in your c-mode-common-hook, which is run both by | |
3456 | c-mode and c++-mode. You can also set up "styles" in the same way | |
3457 | that you could with c-mode.el. The variable c-basic-offset controls | |
3458 | the basic offset given to a level of indentation. | |
3459 | ||
3460 | If, for example, you wanted to change this style: | |
3461 | ||
177c0ea7 | 3462 | int foo (int i) |
a933dad1 DL |
3463 | { |
3464 | switch (i) { | |
3465 | case 1: | |
3466 | printf ("its a foo\n"); | |
3467 | break; | |
3468 | default: | |
3469 | printf ("don't know what it is\n"); | |
3470 | break; | |
3471 | } | |
3472 | } | |
3473 | ||
3474 | into this: | |
3475 | ||
177c0ea7 | 3476 | int foo (int i) |
a933dad1 DL |
3477 | { |
3478 | switch (i) { | |
3479 | case 1: | |
3480 | printf ("its a foo\n"); | |
3481 | break; | |
3482 | default: | |
3483 | printf ("don't know what it is\n"); | |
3484 | break; | |
3485 | } | |
3486 | } | |
3487 | ||
3488 | you could add the following to your .emacs file: | |
3489 | ||
3490 | (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
3491 | (c-set-offset 'case-label 2) | |
3492 | (c-set-offset 'statement-case-intro 2)) | |
3493 | (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
3494 | ||
3495 | ** New variables: | |
3496 | ||
3497 | c-offsets-alist contains an association list of syntactic symbols and | |
3498 | their relative offsets. Do a "C-h v c-offsets-alist" to get a list of | |
3499 | all syntactic symbols currently defined, and their meanings. You | |
3500 | should not change this variable directly; use the supplied interface | |
3501 | commands c-set-offset and c-set-style. | |
3502 | ||
3503 | c-mode-common-hook is run by both c-mode and c++-mode during their | |
3504 | common initializations. You should put any customizations that are | |
3505 | the same for both C and C++ into this hook. | |
3506 | ||
3507 | The variable c-strict-semantics-p is used mainly for debugging. When | |
3508 | non-nil, CC mode signals an error if it returns a syntactic symbol | |
3509 | that can't be found in c-offsets-alist. | |
3510 | ||
3511 | If you want CC mode to echo the syntactic analysis for a particular | |
3512 | line when you hit the TAB key, set c-echo-semantic-information-p to | |
3513 | non-nil. | |
3514 | ||
3515 | c-basic-offset controls the standard amount of offset for a level of | |
3516 | indentation. You can set a syntactic symbol's offset to + or - as a | |
3517 | short-hand for positive or negative c-basic-offset. | |
3518 | ||
3519 | c-comment-only-line-offset lets you control indentation given to lines | |
3520 | which contain only a comment, in the case of C++ line style comments, | |
3521 | or the introduction to a C block comment. Comment-only lines at | |
3522 | column zero can be anchored there independent of the indentation given | |
3523 | to other comment-only lines. | |
3524 | ||
3525 | c-block-comments-indent-p controls the style of C block comment | |
3526 | re-indentation. If you put leading stars in front of comment | |
3527 | continuation lines, you should set this variable to nil. | |
3528 | ||
3529 | c-cleanup-list is a list describing certain C and C++ constructs to be | |
3530 | "cleaned up" as they are typed, but only when the auto-newline feature | |
3531 | is turned on. In C++, make sure this variable contains at least | |
3532 | 'scope-operator so that double colons will not be separated by a | |
3533 | newline. | |
3534 | ||
3535 | Colons (`:') and braces (`{` and `}') are special in C and C++. For | |
3536 | certain constructs, you may like them to hang on the right edge of the | |
3537 | code, or you may like them to start a new line of code. You can use | |
3538 | the two variables c-hanging-braces-alist and c-hanging-colons-alist | |
3539 | to control whether newlines are placed before and/or after colons and | |
3540 | braces when certain C and C++ constructs are entered. For example, | |
3541 | you can control whether the colon that introduces a C++ member | |
3542 | initialization list hangs on the right edge, starts a new line, or has | |
3543 | no newlines either before or after it. | |
3544 | ||
3545 | c-special-indent-hook is run after a line is indented by CC mode. You | |
3546 | can perform any custom indentations here. | |
3547 | ||
3548 | c-delete-function is the function that is called when a single | |
3549 | character is deleted with the c-electric-delete command (DEL). | |
3550 | ||
3551 | c-electric-pound-behavior describes what happens when you enter the | |
3552 | `#' that introduces a cpp macro. | |
3553 | ||
3554 | If c-tab-always-indent is neither t nor nil, then TAB inserts a tab | |
3555 | when within strings, comments, and cpp directives, but it reindents | |
3556 | the line unconditionally. | |
3557 | ||
3558 | c-inhibit-startup-warnings-p inhibits warnings about any old | |
3559 | version of Emacs you might be running, which could be incompatible | |
3560 | with cc-mode. | |
3561 | ||
3562 | ** There are two new minor-mode features in CC mode: auto-newline and | |
3563 | hungry-delete. Auto-newline inserts newlines automatically as you | |
3564 | type certain constructs. Hungry-delete consumes all preceding | |
3565 | whitespace (spaces, tabs, and newlines) when the delete key is hit. | |
3566 | You can toggle auto-newline on and off on a per-buffer basis by | |
3567 | hitting C-c C-a. You can toggle hungry-delete on and off by hitting | |
3568 | C-c C-d. You can toggle them both on and off together with C-c C-t. | |
3569 | ||
3570 | ** Slash (`/') and star (`*') are now both electric characters. | |
3571 | ||
3572 | ** New commands: | |
3573 | ||
3574 | The new C-c C-o (c-set-offset) command can be used to interactively change | |
3575 | the offset for a particular syntactic symbol. | |
3576 | ||
3577 | The new command C-c : (c-scope-operator) inserts the C++ scope operator in | |
3578 | c++-mode only. | |
3579 | ||
3580 | The new command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) indents the entire enclosing | |
3581 | top-level function or class. | |
3582 | ||
3583 | The new command C-c C-s (c-show-semantic-information) echos the current | |
3584 | syntactic analysis without re-indenting the current line. | |
3585 | ||
3586 | The new commands M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature and M-x | |
3587 | c-backward-into-nomenclature (currently otherwise unbound to a key | |
3588 | sequence), make movement easier when using the C++ variable naming | |
3589 | convention of VariableNamesWithoutUnderscoresButEachWordCapitalized. | |
3590 | ||
3591 | ** Command from c-mode.el that have been renamed in cc-mode.el: | |
3592 | ||
3593 | electric-c-brace => c-electric-brace | |
3594 | electric-c-semi => c-electric-semi&comma | |
3595 | electric-c-sharp-sign => c-electric-pound | |
3596 | mark-c-function => c-mark-function | |
3597 | electric-c-terminator => c-electric-colon | |
3598 | indent-c-exp => c-indent-exp | |
3599 | set-c-style => c-set-style | |
3600 | ||
3601 | ** Variables from c-mode.el that are obsolete with cc-mode.el: | |
3602 | ||
3603 | c-indent-level | |
3604 | c-brace-imaginary-offset | |
3605 | c-brace-offset | |
3606 | c-argdecl-indent | |
3607 | c-label-offset | |
3608 | c-continued-statement-offset | |
3609 | c-continued-brace-offset | |
9a21d88b | 3610 | |
a933dad1 DL |
3611 | \f |
3612 | * Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.23. | |
3613 | ||
3614 | ** To pop up a dialog box, call x-popup-dialog. | |
3615 | It takes two arguments, POSITION and CONTENTS. | |
3616 | ||
3617 | POSITION specifies which frame to place the dialog box over; | |
3618 | the dialog box always goes on the center of the frame. | |
3619 | POSITION may be a mouse event, a window, a frame, | |
3620 | or t meaning use the frame that the mouse is in. | |
3621 | ||
3622 | CONTENTS specifies the contents of the dialog box. | |
3623 | It looks like a single pane of a popup menu: | |
3624 | (TITLE ITEM1 ITEM2 ...), where each ITEM has the form (STRING . VALUE). | |
3625 | The return value is VALUE from the chosen item. | |
3626 | ||
3627 | An ITEM may also be just a string--that makes a nonselectable item. | |
3628 | An ITEM may also be nil--that means to put all preceding items | |
3629 | on the left of the dialog box and all following items on the right. | |
3630 | (By default, approximately half appear on each side.) | |
3631 | ||
3632 | If your Emacs is not using an X toolkit, then it cannot display a | |
3633 | real dialog box; so instead it displays a pop-up menu in the center | |
3634 | of the frame. | |
3635 | ||
3636 | ** y-or-n-p, yes-or-no-p and map-y-or-n-p now use menus or dialog boxes | |
3637 | to ask their question(s) if the command that is running was reached by | |
3638 | a mouse event. | |
3639 | ||
3640 | If you want to control which way these functions work, bind the | |
3641 | variable last-nonmenu-event around the call. These functions use the | |
3642 | keyboard if that variable holds a keyboard event (actually, any | |
3643 | non-list); they use the mouse if that variable holds a mouse event | |
3644 | (actually, any list). | |
3645 | ||
3646 | ** The mouse-face property is now implemented, both in overlays and as | |
3647 | a text property. It specifies a face to use when the mouse is in the | |
3648 | range of text for which the property is specified. | |
3649 | ||
3650 | ** When text has a non-nil `intangible' property, you cannot move point | |
3651 | within it or right before it. If you try, point actually moves to the | |
3652 | end of the intangible text. Note that this means that backward-char | |
3653 | is a no-op when there is an intangible character to the left of point. | |
3654 | ||
3655 | ** minibuffer-exit-hook is a new normal hook that is run when you | |
3656 | exit the minibuffer. | |
3657 | ||
3658 | ** The variable x-cross-pointer-shape specifies the cursor shape to use | |
3659 | when the mouse is over text that has a mouse-face property. | |
3660 | ||
3661 | ** The new variable interpreter-mode-alist specifies major modes to use | |
3662 | for shell scripts that specify a command interpreter. Its elements | |
3663 | look like (INTERPRETER . MODE); for example, ("perl" . perl-mode) is | |
3664 | one element present by default. This feature applies only when the | |
3665 | file name doesn't indicate which mode to use. | |
3666 | ||
3667 | ** If you use a minibuffer-only frame, set the variable | |
3668 | minibuffer-auto-raise to t, and entering the minibuffer will then | |
3669 | raise the minibuffer frame. | |
3670 | ||
3671 | ** If pop-up-frames is t, display-buffer now looks for an existing | |
3672 | window in any visible frame, showing the specified buffer, and uses | |
3673 | such a window in preference to making a new frame. | |
3674 | ||
3675 | ** In the functions next-window, previous-window, next-frame, | |
3676 | previous-frame, get-buffer-window, get-lru-window, get-largest-window | |
3677 | and delete-windows-on, if you specify `visible' for the last argument, | |
3678 | it means to consider all visible frames. | |
3679 | ||
3680 | ** Mouse events now give the X and Y coordinates in pixels, rather than | |
3681 | in characters. You can convert these values to characters by dividing by | |
3682 | the values of (frame-char-width) and (frame-char-height). | |
3683 | ||
3684 | ** The new functions mouse-pixel-position and set-mouse-pixel-position | |
3685 | read and set the mouse position in units of pixels. The existing | |
3686 | functions mouse-position and set-mouse-position continue to work with | |
3687 | units of characters. | |
3688 | ||
3689 | ** The new function compute-motion is useful for computing the width | |
3690 | of certain text when it is displayed. | |
3691 | ||
3692 | ** The function vertical-motion now takes an option second argument WINDOW | |
3693 | which says which window to use for the display calculations. | |
3694 | ||
3695 | vertical-motion always operates on the current buffer. | |
3696 | It is ok to specify a window displaying some other buffer. | |
3697 | Then vertical-motion uses the width, hscroll and display-table of | |
3698 | the specified window, but still scans the current buffer. | |
3699 | ||
3700 | ** An error no longer sets last-command to t; the value of last-command | |
3701 | does reflect the previous command (the one that got an error). | |
3702 | ||
3703 | If you do not want a particular command to be recognized as the | |
3704 | previous command in the case where it got an error, you must code that | |
3705 | command to prevent this. Set this-command to t at the beginning of | |
3706 | the command, and set this-command back to its proper value at the end, | |
3707 | like this: | |
3708 | ||
3709 | (defun foo (args...) | |
3710 | (interactive ...) | |
3711 | (setq this-command t) | |
3712 | ...do the work... | |
3713 | (setq this-command 'foo)) | |
3714 | ||
3715 | or like this: | |
3716 | ||
3717 | (defun foo (args...) | |
3718 | (interactive ...) | |
3719 | (let ((old-this-command this-command)) | |
3720 | (setq this-command t) | |
3721 | ...do the work... | |
3722 | (setq this-command old-this-command))) | |
3723 | ||
3724 | The undo and yank commands do this. | |
3725 | ||
3726 | ** If you specify an explicit title for a new frame when you create it, | |
3727 | the title is used as the resource name when looking up X resources to | |
177c0ea7 | 3728 | control the shape of that frame. If you don't specify the frame title, |
a933dad1 DL |
3729 | the value of x-resource-name is used, as before. |
3730 | ||
3731 | ** The frame parameter user-position, if non-nil, says that the user | |
3732 | has specified the frame position. Emacs reports this to the window | |
3733 | manager, to tell it not to override the position that the user | |
3734 | specified. | |
3735 | ||
3736 | ** Major modes can now set change-major-mode-hook to arrange for state | |
3737 | to be cleaned up when the user switches to a new major mode. The function | |
3738 | kill-all-local-variables runs this hook. For best results, make the hook a | |
3739 | buffer-local variable so that it will disappear after doing its job and will | |
3740 | not interfere with the subsequent major mode. | |
3741 | ||
3742 | ** The new variable overriding-local-map, if non-nil, specifies a keymap | |
3743 | that overrides the current local map, all minor mode keymaps, and all | |
3744 | text property keymaps. Incremental search uses this feature to override | |
3745 | all other keymaps temporarily. | |
3746 | ||
3747 | ** A key definition in a menu keymap can now have additional structure: | |
3748 | in addition to (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] . COMMAND) which was allowed | |
3749 | before, the form (ITEMNAME [HELPSTRING] (...) . COMMAND) is | |
3750 | allowed. (HELPSTRING is optional, and is not currently used.) | |
3751 | ||
3752 | Here (...) represents a sublist containing information about keyboard | |
3753 | key sequences that run the same command COMMAND. Displaying the menu | |
3754 | automatically creates and updates the sublist when appropriate; you | |
3755 | need never set these up yourself. | |
3756 | ||
3757 | lookup-key, key-binding, and similar functions return just COMMAND, | |
3758 | not the whole binding. | |
3759 | ||
3760 | To precompute this information for a given keymap, you can do | |
3761 | (x-popup-menu nil KEYMAP). | |
3762 | ||
3763 | ** When you specify coordinates for x-popup-menu as a list ((XOFFSET | |
3764 | YOFFSET) WINDOW), the coordinates are now measured in pixels. | |
3765 | ||
3766 | ** where-is-internal now takes just four arguments: | |
3767 | DEFINITION KEYMAP FIRSTONLY NOINDIRECT. | |
3768 | The single argument KEYMAP replaces two arguments KEYMAP and KEYMAP1. | |
3769 | ||
3770 | If KEYMAP is non-nil, where-is-internal searches only KEYMAP and the | |
3771 | global keymap. | |
3772 | ||
3773 | If KEYMAP is nil, where-is-internal searches all the currently active | |
3774 | keymaps, but finds the active keymaps as if overriding-local-map were | |
3775 | nil. | |
3776 | ||
3777 | If you pass a list of the form (keymap) as KEYMAP, where-is-internal | |
3778 | searches only the global map. (This is not a special case--it follows | |
3779 | from the specifications above.) | |
3780 | ||
3781 | If you pass the value of overriding-local-map as KEYMAP, where-is-internal | |
3782 | searches in exactly the same was as command execution does. | |
3783 | ||
3784 | ** Use the macro define-derived-mode to define a new major mode that | |
3785 | inherits the definition of another major mode. Here's how to define a | |
3786 | command named hypertext-mode that inherits from the command text-mode: | |
3787 | ||
3788 | (define-derived-mode hypertext-mode text-mode "Hypertext" | |
3789 | "Major mode for hypertext.\n\n\\{hypertext-mode-map}" | |
3790 | (setq case-fold-search nil)) | |
3791 | ||
3792 | (define-key hypertext-mode-map [down-mouse-3] 'do-hyper-link) | |
3793 | ||
3794 | The new mode has its own keymap, which inherits from that of the | |
3795 | original mode. It also has its own syntax and abbrev tables, which | |
3796 | are initialized by copying those of the original mode. It also has | |
3797 | its own mode hook. All are given names made by appending a suffix | |
3798 | to the name of the new mode. | |
3799 | ||
3800 | ** A syntax table can now inherit the data for some characters from | |
3801 | standard-syntax-table, while specifying other characters itself. | |
3802 | Syntax code 13 means "inherit this character from the standard syntax | |
3803 | table." In modify-syntax-entry, the character `@' represents this code. | |
3804 | ||
3805 | The function `make-syntax-table' now creates a syntax table which | |
3806 | inherits all letters and control characters (0 to 31 and 128 to 255) | |
3807 | from the standard syntax table, while copying the other characters | |
3808 | from the standard syntax table. Most syntax tables in Emacs are set | |
3809 | up this way. | |
3810 | ||
3811 | This sort of inheritance is useful for people who set up character | |
3812 | sets with additional alphabetic characters in the range 128 to 255. | |
3813 | Just changing the standard syntax for these characters affects all | |
3814 | major modes. | |
3815 | ||
3816 | ** The new function transpose-regions swaps two regions of the buffer. | |
3817 | It preserves the markers in those two regions, so that they stay with | |
3818 | the surrounding text as it is swapped. | |
3819 | ||
3820 | ** revert-buffer now runs before-revert-hook at the beginning and | |
3821 | after-revert-hook at the end. These can be used by minor modes | |
3822 | that need to clean up state variables. | |
3823 | ||
3824 | ** The new function get-char-property is like get-text-property, but | |
3825 | checks for overlays with properties as well as for text properties. | |
3826 | It checks for overlays first, in order of descending priority, and | |
3827 | text properties last. | |
3828 | ||
3829 | get-char-property allows windows as the OBJECT argument, as well | |
3830 | as buffers and strings. If you specify a window, then only overlays | |
3831 | active on that window are considered. | |
3832 | ||
3833 | ** Overlays can have the `invisible' property. | |
3834 | ||
177c0ea7 | 3835 | ** The function insert-file-contents now takes an optional fifth |
a933dad1 DL |
3836 | argument called REPLACE. If this is t, it means to replace the |
3837 | contents of the buffer (actually, just the accessible portion) | |
3838 | with the contents of the file. | |
3839 | ||
3840 | This is better than simply deleting and inserting the whole thing | |
3841 | because (1) it preserves some marker positions and (2) it puts less | |
3842 | data in the undo list. | |
3843 | ||
3844 | ** The variable inhibit-first-line-modes-regexps specifies classes of | |
3845 | file names for which -*- on the first line should not be looked for. | |
3846 | ||
3847 | ** The variables before-change-functions and after-change-functions | |
3848 | hold lists of functions to call before and after a change in the | |
3849 | buffer's text. They work much like before-change-function and | |
3850 | after-change-function, except that they hold a list of functions | |
3851 | instead of just one. | |
3852 | ||
3853 | These variables will eventually make before-change-function and | |
3854 | after-change-function obsolete. | |
3855 | ||
3856 | ** The variable kill-buffer-query-functions holds a list of functions | |
3857 | to be called with no arguments when a buffer is about to be killed. | |
3858 | (That buffer is the current buffer when the function is called.) | |
3859 | If any of the functions returns nil, the buffer is not killed | |
3860 | (and the remaining functions in the list are not called). | |
3861 | ||
3862 | ** The variable kill-emacs-query-functions holds a list of functions | |
3863 | to be called with no arguments when you ask to exit Emacs. | |
3864 | If any of the functions returns nil, the exit is canceled | |
3865 | (and the remaining functions in the list are not called). | |
3866 | ||
3867 | ** The argument for buffer-disable-undo is now optional, | |
3868 | like the argument for buffer-enable-undo. | |
3869 | ||
3870 | ** The new variable system-configuration holds the canonical three-part | |
3871 | GNU configuration name for which Emacs was built. | |
3872 | ||
3873 | ** The function system-name now tries harder to return a fully qualified | |
3874 | domain name. | |
3875 | ||
3876 | ** The variable emacs-major-version holds the major version number | |
3877 | of Emacs. (Currently 19.) | |
3878 | ||
3879 | ** The variable emacs-minor-version holds the minor version number | |
3880 | of Emacs. (Currently 23.) | |
3881 | ||
3882 | ** The default value of comint-input-autoexpand is now nil. | |
3883 | However, Shell mode sets it from the value of shell-input-autoexpand, | |
3884 | whose default value is `history'. | |
3885 | ||
3886 | ** The new function set-process-window-size specifies the terminal window | |
3887 | size for a subprocess. On some systems it sends the subprocess a signal | |
3888 | to let it know that the size has changed. | |
3889 | ||
3890 | ** %P is a new way to display a percentage in the mode line. It | |
3891 | displays the percentage of the buffer text that is above the *bottom* | |
3892 | of the window (which includes the text visible, in the window as well | |
3893 | as the text above the top). It displays `Top' as well as the | |
3894 | percentage if the top of the buffer is visible on screen. | |
3895 | ||
3896 | ** %+ in the mode line specs displays `*' if the buffer is modified, | |
3897 | and otherwise `-'. It never displays `%', as `%*' would do; whether the | |
3898 | buffer is read-only has no effect on %+. | |
3899 | ||
3900 | ** The new functions ffloor, fceiling, fround and ftruncate take a | |
3901 | floating point argument and return a floating point result whose value | |
3902 | is a nearby integer. ffloor returns the nearest integer below; fceiling, | |
3903 | the nearest integer above; ftruncate, the nearest integer in the | |
3904 | direction towards zero; fround, the nearest integer. | |
3905 | ||
3906 | ** Setting `print-escape-newlines' to a non-nil value now also makes | |
3907 | formfeeds print as ``\f''. | |
3908 | ||
3909 | ** auto-mode-alist now has a new feature. If an element has the form | |
3910 | (REGEXP FUNCTION t), and REGEXP matches the file name, then after calling | |
3911 | FUNCTION, Emacs deletes the part of the file name that matched REGEXP | |
3912 | and then searches auto-mode-alist again for a new match. | |
3913 | ||
3914 | This is useful for uncompression packages. An entry of this sort for | |
3915 | .gz can uncompress the file and then put the uncompressed file in the | |
3916 | proper mode according to the name sans .gz. | |
3917 | ||
3918 | ** The new function emacs-pid returns the process ID number of Emacs. | |
3919 | ||
3920 | ** user-login-name now consistently checks the LOGNAME environment | |
3921 | variable before USER. user-original-login-name is obsolete, since it | |
3922 | provides the same functionality. To ignore the environment variables, | |
3923 | use user-real-login-name. | |
3924 | ||
3925 | ** There is a more general way of handling the system-specific X | |
3926 | keysyms. Set the variable system-key-alist to an alist containing | |
3927 | elements of the form (CODE . SYMBOL), where CODE is the numeric keysym | |
3928 | code minus the "vendor specific" bit, and symbol is the name for the | |
3929 | function key. | |
3930 | ||
3931 | ** You can use the variable command-line-functions to set up functions | |
3932 | to process unrecognized command line arguments. The variable's value | |
3933 | should be a list of functions of no arguments. The functions are | |
3934 | called successively until one of them returns non-nil. | |
3935 | ||
3936 | Each function should access the free variables argi (the current | |
3937 | argument) and command-line-args-left (the remaining arguments). The | |
3938 | function should return non-nil only if it recognizes and processes the | |
3939 | argument in argi. If it does so, it may consume following arguments | |
3940 | as well by removing them from command-line-args-left. | |
3941 | ||
3942 | ** There's a new way for a magic file name handler to run a primitive | |
3943 | and inhibit handling of the file name. Here is how to do it: | |
3944 | ||
3945 | (let ((inhibit-file-name-handlers | |
177c0ea7 | 3946 | (cons 'ange-ftp-file-handler |
a933dad1 DL |
3947 | (and (eq inhibit-file-name-operation operation) |
3948 | inhibit-file-name-handlers))) | |
3949 | (inhibit-file-name-operation operation)) | |
3950 | (apply this-operation args)) | |
3951 | ||
3952 | The function find-file-name-handler now takes two arguments. The | |
3953 | second argument is OPERATION, the operation for which the handler is | |
3954 | being sought. | |
3955 | ||
3956 | People have suggested that the second argument should be optional, for | |
3957 | backward compatibility. It would be nice if that were possible, but | |
3958 | it is not. There is simply no way for find-file-name-handler to do | |
3959 | the right thing without receiving the proper value for its second | |
3960 | argument. | |
3961 | ||
3962 | ** The variable completion-regexp-list affects the completion | |
3963 | primitives try-completion and all-completions. They consider | |
3964 | only the possible completions that match each regexp in the list. | |
3965 | ||
3966 | ** Case conversion in the function replace-match has been changed. | |
3967 | ||
3968 | The old behavior was this: if any word in the old text was | |
3969 | capitalized, replace-match capitalized each word of the replacement | |
3970 | text. | |
3971 | ||
3972 | The new behavior is this: if the first word in the old text is capitalized, | |
3973 | replace-match capitalizes the first word of the replacement text. | |
3974 | ||
3975 | ** You can now specify a case table with CANON non-nil and EQV nil. | |
3976 | Then the EQV part of the case table is deduced from CANON. | |
3977 | ||
3978 | ** The new function minibuffer-prompt takes no arguments and returns | |
3979 | the current minibuffer prompt string. | |
3980 | ||
3981 | The new function minibuffer-prompt-width takes no arguments and | |
3982 | returns the display width of the minibuffer prompt string. | |
3983 | ||
3984 | ** The new function frame-first-window returns the window at the | |
3985 | upper left corner of a given frame. | |
3986 | ||
3987 | ** wholenump is a new alias for natnump. | |
3988 | ||
3989 | ** The variable installation-directory, if non-@code{nil}, names a | |
3990 | directory within which to look for the `lib-src' and `etc' | |
3991 | subdirectories. This is non-nil when Emacs can't find those | |
3992 | directories in their standard installed locations, but can find them | |
3993 | near where the Emacs executable was found. | |
3994 | ||
3995 | ** invocation-name and invocation-directory are now variables as well | |
3996 | as functions. The variable values are the same values that the | |
3997 | functions return: the Emacs program name sans directories, and the | |
3998 | directory it was found in. (invocation-directory may be nil, if Emacs | |
3999 | can't determine which directory it should be.) | |
4000 | ||
4001 | ** Installation change regarding version number counting. | |
4002 | ||
4003 | The version number of an Emacs executable contains three numbers. | |
4004 | The first two describe the Emacs release and the third increments | |
4005 | each time you build Emacs. | |
4006 | ||
4007 | Now the file version.el contains only the first two version numbers. | |
4008 | The third component is now determined on the basis of the names of the | |
4009 | existing executable files. This means that version.el is not altered | |
4010 | by building Emacs. | |
9a21d88b KS |
4011 | |
4012 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4013 | \f |
4014 | * Changes in 19.22. | |
4015 | ||
4016 | ** The mouse click M-mouse-2 now inserts the current secondary | |
4017 | selection (from Emacs or any other X client) where you click. | |
4018 | It does not move point. | |
4019 | This command is called mouse-yank-secondary. | |
4020 | ||
4021 | mouse-kill-secondary no longer has a key binding by default. | |
4022 | Clicking M-mouse-3 (mouse-secondary-save-then-kill) twice | |
4023 | may be a convenient enough way of killing the secondary selection. | |
4024 | Or perhaps there should be a keyboard binding for killing the | |
4025 | secondary selection. Any suggestions? | |
4026 | ||
4027 | ** New packages: | |
4028 | ||
4029 | *** `icomplete' provides character-by-character information | |
4030 | about what you could complete if you type TAB. | |
4031 | ||
4032 | *** `avoid' moves the mouse away from point so that it doesn't hide | |
4033 | your typing. | |
4034 | ||
4035 | *** `shadowfile' helps you update files that are supposed to be stored | |
4036 | identically in different places (perhaps on different machines). | |
4037 | ||
4038 | ** C-h p now knows about four additional keywords: data, faces, mouse, | |
4039 | and matching. | |
4040 | ||
4041 | ** The key for starting an inferior Lisp process, in Lisp mode, | |
4042 | is now C-c C-z instead of C-c C-l. | |
4043 | ||
4044 | ** When the VC commands ask whether to save the buffer, if you say no, | |
4045 | they signal an error. This is so that you won't operate on the wrong | |
4046 | data. | |
4047 | ||
4048 | ** ISO Accents mode now supports `"s' as a way of typing German sharp s. | |
4049 | ||
4050 | ** By default, comint buffers (including Shell mode and debuggers) | |
4051 | no longer try to scroll to keep the cursor on the bottom line. | |
4052 | This feature was added in 19.21 but did not work smoothly enough. | |
4053 | ||
4054 | ** Emacs now handles the window manager "delete window" operation. | |
4055 | ||
4056 | ** Display of buffers with text properties is much faster now. | |
4057 | ||
4058 | ** The feature previously announced whereby `insert' does not inherit | |
4059 | text properties from surrounding text was not fully implemented | |
4060 | before; but now it is. use `insert-and-inherit' if you wish to | |
4061 | inherit sticky properties from the surrounding text. | |
4062 | ||
4063 | ** The functions next-property-change, previous-property-change, | |
4064 | next-single-property-change, and previous-single-property-change | |
4065 | now take one additional optional argument LIMIT that is a position at | |
4066 | which to stop scanning. If scan ends without finding the property | |
4067 | change sought, these functions return the specified limit. | |
4068 | ||
4069 | The value returned by previous-single-property-change and | |
4070 | previous-property-change, when they do find a change, is now one | |
4071 | greater than what it used to be. It is the position between the two | |
4072 | characters whose properties differ, which is one greater than the | |
4073 | position of the first character found (while scanning back) with | |
4074 | different properties. | |
9a21d88b KS |
4075 | |
4076 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4077 | \f |
4078 | * User editing changes in version 19.21. | |
4079 | ||
4080 | ** ISO Accents mode supports four additional characters: | |
4081 | A-with-ring (entered as /A), AE ligature (entered as /E), | |
4082 | and their lower-case equivalents. | |
9a21d88b KS |
4083 | |
4084 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4085 | \f |
4086 | * User editing changes in version 19.20. | |
4087 | (See following page for Lisp programming changes.) | |
4088 | ||
4089 | Note that some of these changes were made subsequent to the Emacs 19.20 | |
4090 | editions of the Emacs manual and Emacs Lisp manual; therefore, if you | |
4091 | have those editions, do read this page. | |
4092 | ||
4093 | ** Dragging with mouse button 1 now puts the selected region | |
4094 | in the kill ring so you can paste it into other X applications. | |
4095 | ||
4096 | ** Double and triple clicks with button 1 now behave as in xterm, | |
4097 | selecting the word or line surrounding where you click. If you drag | |
4098 | after the last click, you can select a range of words or lines. | |
4099 | ||
4100 | ** You can use button 3 to extend a mouse-selected region, as in xterm. | |
4101 | This works for regions selected either by dragging Mouse-1 or by | |
4102 | multiple-clicking Mouse-1. Clicking Mouse-3 moves the end of the | |
4103 | region that is (initially) nearer to where you click. | |
4104 | ||
4105 | If the selection was first made by multiple-clicking Mouse-1, and thus | |
4106 | consists of entire words or lines, Mouse-3 preserves that state. | |
4107 | ||
4108 | As before, clicking Mouse-3 again in the same place kills the region | |
4109 | thus selected. | |
4110 | ||
4111 | ** The secondary selection commands, M-Mouse-1 and M-Mouse-3, have been | |
4112 | likewise modified. | |
4113 | ||
4114 | ** You can now search for strings and regexps using the Edit menu bar menu. | |
4115 | ||
4116 | ** You can now access bookmarks using the Bookmark submenu in the File | |
4117 | menu in the menu bar. | |
4118 | ||
4119 | ** ISO Accents mode, a buffer-local minor mode, provides a convenient | |
4120 | way to type certain non-ASCII characters. It makes the characters `, | |
4121 | ', ", ^, ~ and / serve as modifiers for the following letter. ` and ' | |
4122 | add accents, " adds an umlaut or dieresis, ^ adds a circumflex, ~ | |
4123 | adds a tilde, and / adds a slash to the following letter. | |
4124 | ||
4125 | If the following character is not a letter, or cannot be modified as | |
4126 | requested, then both characters stand for themselves. If you | |
4127 | duplicate the modifier accent character, that enters the corresponding | |
4128 | ISO non-spacing accent character (thus, '' enters the ISO acute-accent | |
4129 | character). To enter a modifier character itself, type it followed by | |
4130 | a space. | |
4131 | ||
4132 | This feature can be used whenever a key sequence is expected: for | |
4133 | ordinary insertion, for searching, and for certain command arguments. | |
4134 | ||
4135 | A few special combinations: | |
4136 | ||
4137 | ~c => c with cedilla | |
4138 | ~d => d with stroke | |
4139 | ~< => left guillemot | |
4140 | ~> => right guillemot | |
4141 | ||
4142 | ** iso-transl.el is a new library that replaces iso-insert.el. | |
4143 | It defines C-x 8 as an insertion prefix for the ISO characters | |
4144 | between 128 and 255, much like iso-insert, except that iso-transl | |
4145 | works even in searches and help commands--wherever a key sequence | |
4146 | is expected. | |
4147 | ||
4148 | To define case-conversion for these characters for ISO 8859/1, | |
4149 | load the library iso-syntax. (This is not new.) | |
4150 | ||
4151 | ** M-TAB in Text mode now runs the command ispell-complete-word | |
4152 | which performs completion using the spelling dictionary. | |
4153 | ||
177c0ea7 | 4154 | The spelling correction submenu now includes this command |
a933dad1 DL |
4155 | and another command which completes a word fragment (that is, |
4156 | it doesn't assume that the text to be completed starts at the | |
4157 | beginning of a word. | |
4158 | ||
4159 | ** In incremental search, you can use M-y to yank the most recent kill | |
4160 | into the search string. | |
4161 | ||
4162 | ** The new function ispell-message checks the spelling of a message | |
4163 | you are about to send or post. It ignores text cited from other | |
4164 | messages. | |
4165 | ||
4166 | To automatically check all your outgoing messages, include the | |
4167 | following line in your .emacs file: | |
4168 | (setq news-inews-hook (setq mail-send-hook 'ispell-message)) | |
4169 | ||
4170 | ** There is now a separate minibuffer history list for the names of | |
4171 | extended commands. This history list is used by M-x when reading | |
4172 | the command name. The motivation for this is to prevent command | |
4173 | names from appearing in the history used for other minibuffer | |
4174 | arguments. | |
4175 | ||
4176 | Note that the history list for entire commands that use the minibuffer | |
4177 | is a separate feature. That history list records a command with all | |
4178 | its arguments, and you must use C-x ESC ESC to access it. | |
4179 | ||
4180 | ** You can use the new command C-x v ~ VERSION RET to examine a | |
4181 | specified version of a file that is maintained with version control. | |
4182 | ||
4183 | ** In Indented Text mode, only blank lines now separate paragraphs. | |
4184 | Indented lines continue the paragraph that is in progress. This makes | |
4185 | the user option variable adaptive-fill-mode have its intended effect. | |
4186 | ||
4187 | ** Local variable specifications in files for variables whose names end | |
4188 | in `-hook' and `-function' are now controlled by the variable | |
4189 | `enable-local-eval', just like the `eval' variable. | |
4190 | ||
4191 | ** C-x r j (jump-to-register) when restoring a frame configuration now | |
4192 | makes all unwanted frames (existing frames not mentioned in the | |
4193 | configuration) invisible. | |
4194 | ||
4195 | If you want to delete these unwanted frames, use a prefix argument for | |
4196 | C-x r j. | |
4197 | ||
4198 | ** You can customize the calendar to display weeks beginning on | |
4199 | Monday: set the variable `calendar-week-start-day' to 1. | |
4200 | ||
4201 | ** Rmail changes. | |
4202 | ||
4203 | If you save messages to a file in Unix format while viewing a message | |
4204 | with its whole header, this now copies to the file the entire header | |
4205 | of each message copied. | |
4206 | ||
4207 | ** Comint mode changes. | |
4208 | ||
4209 | C-c C-e shows as much output as possible in the window. | |
4210 | C-c RET copies an old input (the one at point) | |
4211 | and places the copy after the latest prompt. | |
4212 | C-c C-p and C-c C-n move through the buffer, stopping at places | |
4213 | where the subshell prompted for input. | |
4214 | C-c C-h lists the input history in a `*Help*' buffer. | |
4215 | ||
4216 | There are new menu bar items for completion/input/output/signal commands. | |
4217 | ||
dfd67a62 | 4218 | Input behavior is configurable. Variables control whether some windows |
a933dad1 DL |
4219 | showing the buffer scroll to the bottom before insertion. These are |
4220 | `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-input' and `before-change-function'. By default, | |
4221 | insertion causes the selected window to scroll to the bottom before insertion | |
4222 | occurs. | |
4223 | ||
4224 | Subprocess output now keeps point at the end of the buffer in each | |
4225 | window individually if point was already at the end of the buffer in | |
4226 | that window. | |
4227 | ||
4228 | If `comint-scroll-show-maximum-output' is non-nil (which is the | |
4229 | default), then scrolling due to arrival of output tries to place the | |
4230 | last line of text at the bottom line of the window, so as to show as | |
4231 | much useful text as possible. (This mimics the scrolling behavior of | |
4232 | many terminals.) | |
4233 | ||
4234 | By setting `comint-scroll-to-bottom-on-output', you can opt for having | |
4235 | point jump to the end of the buffer whenever output arrives--no matter | |
4236 | where in the buffer point was before. If the value is `this', point | |
4237 | jumps in the selected window. If the value is `all', point jumps in | |
4238 | each window that shows the comint buffer. If the value is `other', | |
4239 | point jumps in all nonselected windows that show the current buffer. | |
4240 | The default value is nil, which means point does not jump to the end. | |
4241 | ||
4242 | Input history insertion is configurable. A variable controls whether only the | |
4243 | first instance of successive identical inputs is stored in the input history. | |
4244 | This is `comint-input-ignoredups'. | |
4245 | ||
4246 | Completion (bound to TAB) is now more general. Depending on context, | |
4247 | completion now operates on the input history, on command names, or (as | |
4248 | before) on filenames. | |
4249 | ||
4250 | Filename completion is configurable. Variables control whether | |
4251 | file/directory suffix characters are added (`comint-completion-addsuffix'), | |
4252 | whether shortest completion is acceptable when no further unambiguous | |
4253 | completion is possible (`comint-completion-recexact'), and the timing of | |
4254 | completion candidate listing (`comint-completion-autolist'). | |
4255 | ||
4256 | Comint mode now provides history expansion. Insert input using `!' | |
4257 | and `^', in the same syntax that typical shells use; then type TAB. | |
4258 | This searches the comint input history for a matching element, | |
4259 | performs substitution if necessary, and places the result in the | |
4260 | comint buffer in place of the original input. | |
4261 | ||
4262 | History references in the input may be expanded before insertion into | |
4263 | the input ring, or on input to the interpreter (and therefore | |
4264 | visibly). The variable `comint-input-autoexpand' specifies which. | |
4265 | ||
4266 | You can make the SPC key perform history expansion by binding | |
4267 | SPC to the command `comint-magic-space'. | |
4268 | ||
4269 | The command `comint-dynamic-complete-variable' does variable name | |
4270 | completion using the environment variables as set within Emacs. The | |
4271 | variables controlling filename completion apply to variable name | |
4272 | completion too. This command is normally available through the menu | |
4273 | bar. | |
4274 | ||
4275 | ** Shell mode | |
4276 | ||
4277 | Paragraph motion and marking commands (default bindings M-{, M-}, M-h) operate | |
4278 | on output groups (i.e., shell prompt plus associated shell output). | |
4279 | ||
4280 | TAB now completes commands, as well as file names and expand history. | |
4281 | Commands are searched for along the path that Emacs has on startup. | |
4282 | ||
4283 | C-c C-f now moves forward a command (`shell-forward-command') and | |
4284 | C-c C-b now moves backward a command (`shell-backward-command'). | |
4285 | ||
4286 | Command completion is configurable. The variables controlling | |
4287 | filename completion in comint mode apply, together with a variable | |
4288 | controlling whether to restrict possible completions to only files | |
4289 | that are executable (`shell-command-execonly'). | |
4290 | ||
e1dbe924 | 4291 | The input history is initialized from the file name given in the |
a933dad1 DL |
4292 | variable `shell-input-ring-file-name'--normally `.history' in your |
4293 | home directory. | |
4294 | ||
4295 | Directory tracking is more robust. It can cope with command sequences | |
4296 | and forked commands, and can detect the failure of directory changing | |
4297 | commands in most circumstances. It's still not infallible, of course. | |
4298 | ||
dfd67a62 | 4299 | You can now configure the behavior of `pushd'. Variables control |
a933dad1 DL |
4300 | whether `pushd' behaves like `cd' if no argument is given |
4301 | (`shell-pushd-tohome'), pop rather than rotate with a numeric argument | |
4302 | (`shell-pushd-dextract'), and only add directories to the directory | |
4303 | stack if they are not already on it (`shell-pushd-dunique'). The | |
4304 | configuration you choose should match the underlying shell, of course. | |
9a21d88b | 4305 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4306 | \f |
4307 | * Emacs Lisp programming changes in Emacs 19.20. | |
4308 | ||
4309 | ** A new function `remove-hook' is now used to remove a hook that you might | |
4310 | have added with `add-hook'. | |
4311 | ||
4312 | ** There is now a Lisp pretty-printer in the library `pp'. | |
4313 | ||
4314 | ** The partial Common Lisp support has been entirely reimplemented. | |
4315 | ||
4316 | ** When you insert text using `insert', `insert-before-markers' or | |
4317 | `insert-buffer-substring', text properties are no longer inherited | |
4318 | from the surrounding text. | |
4319 | ||
4320 | When you want to inherit text properties, use the new functions | |
4321 | `insert-and-inherit' or `insert-before-markers-and-inherit'. | |
4322 | ||
4323 | The self-inserting character command does do inheritance. | |
4324 | ||
4325 | ** Frame creation hooks. | |
4326 | ||
4327 | The function make-frame now runs the normal hooks | |
4328 | before-make-frame-hook and after-make-frame-hook. | |
4329 | ||
4330 | ** You can now use function-key-map to make a key an alias for other | |
4331 | key sequences that can vary depending on circumstances. To do this, | |
4332 | give the key a definition in function-key-map which is a function | |
4333 | rather than a specific expansion key sequence. | |
4334 | ||
4335 | If the function reads input itself, it can have the effect of altering | |
4336 | the event that follows. For example, here's how to define C-c h to | |
4337 | turn the character that follows into a hyper character: | |
4338 | ||
4339 | (define-key function-key-map "\C-ch" 'hyperify) | |
4340 | ||
4341 | (defun hyperify (prompt) | |
4342 | (let ((e (read-event))) | |
4343 | (vector (if (numberp e) | |
4344 | (logior (lsh 1 20) e) | |
4345 | (if (memq 'hyper (event-modifiers e)) | |
4346 | e | |
4347 | (add-event-modifier "H-" e)))))) | |
4348 | ||
4349 | (defun add-event-modifier (string e) | |
4350 | (let ((symbol (if (symbolp e) e (car e)))) | |
4351 | (setq symbol (intern (concat string (symbol-name symbol)))) | |
4352 | (if (symbolp e) | |
4353 | symbol | |
4354 | (cons symbol (cdr e))))) | |
4355 | ||
4356 | The character translation function gets one argument, which is the | |
4357 | prompt that was specified in read-key-sequence--or nil if the key | |
4358 | sequence is being read by the editor command loop. In most cases | |
4359 | you can just ignore the prompt value. | |
4360 | ||
4361 | ** Changes for reading and writing text properties. | |
4362 | ||
4363 | New low-level Lisp features make it possible to write Lisp programs to | |
4364 | save text properties in files, and read text properties from files. | |
4365 | You can program any file format you like. | |
4366 | ||
4367 | The variable `write-region-annotation-functions' should contain a list | |
4368 | of functions to be run by `write-region' to encode text properties in | |
4369 | some fashion as annotations to the text that is written. | |
4370 | ||
4371 | Each function in the list is called with two arguments: the start and | |
4372 | end of the region to be written. These functions should not alter the | |
4373 | contents of the buffer. Instead, they should return lists indicating | |
4374 | annotations to write in the file in addition to the text in the | |
4375 | buffer. | |
4376 | ||
4377 | Each function should return a list of elements of the form (POSITION | |
4378 | . STRING), where POSITION is an integer specifying the relative | |
4379 | position in the text to be written, and STRING is the annotation to | |
4380 | add there. | |
4381 | ||
4382 | Each list returned by one of these functions must be already sorted in | |
4383 | increasing order by POSITION. If there is more than one function, | |
4384 | `write-region' merges the lists destructively into one sorted list. | |
4385 | ||
4386 | When `write-region' actually writes the text from the buffer to the | |
4387 | file, it intermixes the specified annotations at the corresponding | |
4388 | positions. All this takes place without modifying the buffer. | |
4389 | ||
4390 | The variable `after-insert-file-functions' should contain a list of | |
4391 | functions to be run each time a file's contents have been inserted into | |
4392 | a buffer. Each function receives one argument, the length of the | |
4393 | inserted text; point indicates the start of that text. The function | |
4394 | should make whatever changes it wants to make, then return the updated | |
4395 | length of the inserted text, as it stands after those changes. The | |
4396 | value returned by one function is used as the argument to the next. | |
4397 | These functions should always return with point at the beginning of | |
4398 | the inserted text. | |
4399 | ||
4400 | The intended use of `after-insert-file-functions' is for converting | |
4401 | some sort of textual annotations into actual text properties. But many | |
4402 | other uses may be possible. | |
4403 | ||
4404 | We now invite users to begin implementing Lisp programs to store and | |
4405 | retrieve text properties in files, using these new primitive features, | |
4406 | and thus to experiment with various data formats and find good ones. | |
4407 | ||
4408 | We suggest not trying to handle arbitrary Lisp objects as property | |
4409 | names or property values--because a program that general is probably | |
4410 | difficult to write, and slow. Instead, choose a set of possible data | |
4411 | types that are reasonably flexible, and not too hard to encode. | |
4412 | ||
4413 | ** Comint completion. | |
4414 | ||
4415 | Currently comint-dynamic-complete-command (and associated variable | |
4416 | comint-after-partial-pathname-command) are set by default to complete a | |
4417 | filename. Other comint-mode users should have their own functions to achieve | |
4418 | this. For example, gud-mode could complete debugger commands. A completion | |
4419 | function is provided solely for this reason (comint-dynamic-simple-complete). | |
4420 | ||
4421 | Other comint-mode users should bind comint-dynamic-complete (shell-mode does | |
4422 | already). | |
4423 | ||
4424 | ** Comint history reference expansion | |
4425 | ||
4426 | Currently comint-input-autoexpand is 'history, which means only expand | |
4427 | history on insertion to comint-input-ring. For non-shell modes, this is | |
4428 | a strange default, since non-shells will not understand history references. | |
4429 | Perhaps it would be better for the variable to be 'input, which means expand | |
4430 | on RET. | |
4431 | ||
4432 | The value 'history might possibly be wrong even for shells, since the | |
4433 | expansion will be done both by comint and the underlying shell (except sh, of | |
4434 | course). It would be better for expansion to be done by one or the other, | |
4435 | not both since they may (ahem) disagree. Since it is silly to put a literal | |
4436 | history reference into comint-input-ring, perhaps it would be better for the | |
4437 | variable to be 'input too. | |
4438 | ||
4439 | The reason the variable is not 'input by default is that I was attempting to | |
4440 | adhere to The Principle of Least Astonishment. I didn't want to shock users | |
4441 | by having their input change in front of their eyes. | |
4442 | ||
4443 | ** Argument delimiters and Comint mode. | |
4444 | ||
4445 | Currently comint-delimiter-argument-list is '(), which means no strings are | |
4446 | to be treated as delimiters and arguments. In shell-mode, this variable is | |
4447 | set to shell-delimiter-argument-list, '("|" "&" "<" ">" "(" ")" ";"). Other | |
4448 | comint-mode users should set this variable too. For example, a lisp-type | |
4449 | mode might want to set this to '("." "(" ")") or some such. | |
4450 | ||
4451 | ** Comint output hook. | |
4452 | ||
4453 | There is now a hook, comint-output-filter-hook, that is run-hooks'ed by the | |
4454 | output filter, comint-output-filter. This is useful for scrolling (see | |
4455 | below), but also things like processing output for specific text, output | |
4456 | highlighting, etc. | |
4457 | ||
4458 | So that such output processing may be done efficiently, there is a new | |
4459 | variable, comint-last-output-start, that records the position of the start of | |
4460 | the lastest output inserted into the buffer (effectively the previous value | |
4461 | of process-mark). Output processing functions should process the text | |
4462 | between comint-last-output-start (or perhaps the beginning of the line that | |
4463 | the position lies on) and process-mark. | |
4464 | ||
4465 | ** Comint scrolling. | |
4466 | ||
4467 | There is now automatic scrolling of process windows. | |
4468 | ||
4469 | Currently comint-scroll-show-maximum-output is t, which means when scrolling | |
4470 | output put process-mark at the bottom of the window. There is a good case | |
4471 | for it to be t, since the user is likely to want to see as much output as | |
4472 | possible. But, then again, there is a comint-show-maximum-output command. | |
4473 | ||
4474 | ** Comint history retrieval. | |
4475 | ||
4476 | The input following point is not deleted when moving around the input history | |
4477 | (with M-p etc.). Emacs maintainers may not like this. However, I feel this | |
4478 | is a useful feature. The simple remedy is to put end-of-line in before | |
4479 | delete-region in comint-previous-matching-input. | |
4480 | ||
4481 | The input history retrieval commands still wrap-around the input ring, unlike | |
4482 | Emacs command history. | |
9a21d88b KS |
4483 | |
4484 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4485 | \f |
4486 | * Changes in version 19.19. | |
4487 | ||
4488 | ** The new package bookmark.el records named bookmarks: positions that | |
4489 | you can jump to. Bookmarks are saved automatically between Emacs | |
4490 | sessions. | |
4491 | ||
4492 | ** Another simpler package saveplace.el records your position in each | |
4493 | file when you kill its buffer (or kill Emacs), and jumps to the same | |
4494 | position when you visit the file again (even in another Emacs | |
4495 | session). Use `toggle-save-place' to turn on place-saving in a given file; | |
4496 | use (setq-default save-place t) to turn it on for all files. | |
4497 | ||
4498 | ** In Outline mode, you can now customize how to compute the level of a | |
4499 | heading line. Set `outline-level' to a function of no arguments which | |
4500 | returns the level, assuming point is at the beginning of a heading | |
4501 | line. | |
4502 | ||
4503 | ** You can now specify the prefix key to use for Outline minor mode. | |
4504 | (The default is C-c.) Set the variable outline-minor-mode-prefix to | |
4505 | the key sequence you want to use (as a string or vector). | |
4506 | ||
4507 | ** In Bibtex mode, C-c e has been changed to C-c C-b. This is because | |
4508 | C-c followed by a letter is reserved for users. | |
4509 | ||
4510 | ** The `mod' function is no longer an alias for `%', but is a separate function | |
4511 | that yields a result with the same sign as the divisor. `floor' now takes an | |
4512 | optional second argument, which divides the first argument before the floor is | |
4513 | taken. | |
4514 | ||
4515 | ** `%' no longer allows floating point arguments, since the results were often | |
4516 | inconsistent with integer `%'. | |
9a21d88b KS |
4517 | |
4518 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4519 | \f |
4520 | * Changes in version 19.18. | |
4521 | ||
4522 | ** Typing C-z in an iconified Emacs frame now deiconifies it. | |
4523 | ||
4524 | ** hilit19 is a new library for automatic highlighting of parts of the | |
4525 | text in the buffer, based on its meaning and context. | |
4526 | ||
4527 | ** Killing no longer sends the killed text to the X clipboard. | |
4528 | And large strings are not put in the cut buffer either. | |
4529 | The variable x-cut-buffer-max specifies the maximum number of characters | |
4530 | to put in the cut buffer. | |
4531 | ||
4532 | ** The new command C-x 5 o (other-frame) selects different frames, | |
4533 | successively, in cyclic order. It does for frames what C-x o | |
4534 | does for windows. | |
4535 | ||
4536 | ** The command M-ESC (eval-expression) has its own command history. | |
4537 | ||
4538 | ** The commands M-! and M-| for running shell commands have their own | |
4539 | command history. | |
4540 | ||
4541 | ** If the directory containing the Emacs executable has a sibling named | |
4542 | `lisp', that `lisp' directory is added to the end of `load-path' | |
4543 | (provided you don't override the normal value with the EMACSLOADPATH | |
4544 | environment variable). This feature may make it easier to move | |
4545 | an installed Emacs from place to place. | |
4546 | ||
4547 | ** M-x validate-tex-buffer now records the locations of mismatches | |
4548 | found in the `*Occur*' buffer. You can go to that buffer and type C-c | |
4549 | C-c to visit a particular mismatch. | |
4550 | ||
4551 | ** There are new commands in Shell mode. | |
4552 | ||
4553 | C-c C-n and C-c C-p move point to the next or previous shell input line. | |
4554 | ||
4555 | C-c C-d is now another way to send an end-of-file to the subshell. | |
4556 | ||
4557 | ** Changes to calendar/diary. | |
4558 | ||
4559 | Time zone data is now determined automatically, including the | |
8b8f71ed | 4560 | start/stop days and times of daylight saving time. The code now |
a933dad1 DL |
4561 | works correctly almost anywhere in the world. |
4562 | ||
4563 | The format of the holiday specifications has changed and IS NO LONGER | |
4564 | COMPATIBLE with the old (version 18) format. See the documentation of | |
4565 | the variable calendar-holidays for details of the new, improved | |
4566 | format. | |
4567 | ||
4568 | The hook `diary-display-hook' has been split into two: | |
4569 | diary-display-hook which should be used ONLY for the display and | |
4570 | `diary-hook' which should be used for appointment notification. If | |
4571 | diary-display-hook is nil (the default), simple-diary-display is | |
4572 | used. This allows the diary hooks to be correctly set with add-hook. | |
4573 | ||
4574 | The forms used for dates in diary entries and general display are no | |
4575 | longer autoloaded, but set at load time; this means they will be set | |
4576 | correctly based on values you assign to various variables. | |
4577 | ||
4578 | ** The functions x-rebind-key and x-rebind-keys have been deleted, | |
4579 | because you can accomplish the same job by binding keys to keyboard | |
4580 | macros. | |
4581 | ||
4582 | ** Emacs now distinguishes double and triple drag events and double and | |
4583 | triple button-down events. These work analogously to double and | |
4584 | triple click events. | |
4585 | ||
4586 | Double drag events, if not defined, convert to ordinary click events. | |
4587 | Double down events, if not defined, convert first to ordinary down | |
4588 | events, which are then discarded if not defined. Triple events that | |
4589 | are not defined convert to the corresponding double event; if that is | |
4590 | also not defined, it may convert further. | |
4591 | ||
4592 | ** The new function event-click-count returns the number of clicks, | |
4593 | from an event which is a list. It is 1 for an ordinary click, drag, | |
4594 | or button-down event, 2 for a double event, and 3 or more for a triple | |
4595 | event. | |
4596 | ||
4597 | ** The new function previous-frame is like next-frame, but moves | |
4598 | around through the set of existing frames in the opposite order. | |
4599 | ||
4600 | ** The post-command-hook now runs even after commands that get an error | |
4601 | and return to top level. As a consequence of the same change, this | |
4602 | hook also runs before Emacs reads the first command. That might sound | |
4603 | paradoxical, as if this hook were the same as the pre-command-hook. | |
4604 | Actually, they are not similar; the latter runs before *execution* of | |
4605 | a command, but after it has been read. | |
4606 | ||
4607 | ** You can turn off the text property hooks that run when point moves | |
4608 | to certain places in the buffer, by binding inhibit-point-motion-hooks | |
4609 | to a non-nil value. | |
4610 | ||
4611 | ** Inserting a string with no text properties into the buffer normally | |
4612 | inherits the properties of the preceding character. You can now | |
4613 | control this inheritance by setting the front-sticky and | |
4614 | rear-nonsticky properties of a character. | |
4615 | ||
4616 | If you make a character's front-sticky property t, then insertion | |
4617 | before the character inherits its properties. If you make the | |
4618 | rear-nonsticky property t, then insertion after the character does not | |
4619 | inherit its properties. You can regard characters as normally being | |
4620 | rear-sticky and not front-sticky, and this is why insertion normally | |
4621 | inherits from the previous character. | |
4622 | ||
4623 | If neither side of an insertion is suitably sticky, then the inserted | |
4624 | text gets no properties. If both sides are sticky, then the inserted | |
4625 | text gets the properties of both sides, with the previous character's | |
4626 | properties taking precedence when both sides have a property in | |
4627 | common. | |
4628 | ||
4629 | You can also specify stickiness for individual properties. To do so, | |
4630 | use a list of property names as the value of the front-sticky property | |
4631 | or the rear-nonsticky property. For example, if a character has a | |
4632 | rear-nonsticky property whose value is (face read-only), then | |
4633 | insertion after the character will not inherit its face property or | |
4634 | read-only property (if any), but will inherit any other properties. | |
4635 | ||
4636 | The merging of properties when both sides of the insertion are sticky | |
4637 | takes place one property at a time. If the preceding character is | |
4638 | rear-sticky for the property, and the property is non-nil, it | |
4639 | dominates. Otherwise, the following character's property value is | |
4640 | used if it is front-sticky for that property. | |
4641 | ||
4642 | ** If you give a character a non-nil `invisible' text property, the | |
4643 | character does not appear on the screen. This works much like | |
4644 | selective display. | |
4645 | ||
4646 | The details of this feature are likely to change in future Emacs | |
4647 | versions. | |
4648 | ||
4649 | ** In Info, when you go to a node, it runs the normal hook | |
4650 | Info-selection-hook. | |
4651 | ||
4652 | ** You can use the new function `invocation-directory' to get the name | |
4653 | of the directory containing the Emacs executable that was run. | |
4654 | ||
4655 | ** Entry to the minibuffer runs the normal hook minibuffer-setup-hook. | |
4656 | ||
4657 | ** The new function minibuffer-window-active-p takes one argument, a | |
4658 | minibuffer window, and returns t if the window is currently active. | |
9a21d88b KS |
4659 | |
4660 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
4661 | \f |
4662 | * Changes in version 19.17. | |
4663 | ||
177c0ea7 | 4664 | ** When Emacs displays a list of completions in a buffer, |
a933dad1 DL |
4665 | you can select a completion by clicking mouse button 2 |
4666 | on that completion. | |
4667 | ||
177c0ea7 | 4668 | ** Use the command `list-faces-display' to display a list of |
a933dad1 DL |
4669 | all the currently defined faces, showing what they look like. |
4670 | ||
4671 | ** Menu bar items from local maps now come after the usual items. | |
4672 | ||
4673 | ** The Help menu bar item always comes last in the menu bar. | |
4674 | ||
4675 | ** If you enable Font-Lock mode on a buffer containing a program | |
4676 | (certain languages such as C and Lisp are supported), everything you | |
4677 | type is automatically given a face property appropriate to its | |
4678 | syntactic role. For example, there are faces for comments, string | |
4679 | constants, names of functions being defined, and so on. | |
4680 | ||
4681 | ** Dunnet, an adventure game, is now available. | |
4682 | ||
177c0ea7 JB |
4683 | ** Several major modes now have their own menu bar items, |
4684 | including Dired, Rmail, and Sendmail. We would like to add | |
a933dad1 DL |
4685 | suitable menu bar items to other major modes. |
4686 | ||
4687 | ** The key binding C-x a C-h has been eliminated. | |
4688 | This is because it got in the way of the general feature of typing | |
4689 | C-h after a prefix character. If you want to run | |
4690 | inverse-add-global-abbrev, you can use C-x a - or C-x a i g instead. | |
4691 | ||
4692 | ** If you set the variable `rmail-mail-new-frame' to a non-nil value, | |
4693 | all the Rmail commands to send mail make a new frame to do it in. | |
4694 | When you send the message, or use the menu bar command not to send it, | |
4695 | that frame is deleted. | |
4696 | ||
4697 | ** In Rmail, the o and C-o commands are now almost interchangeable. | |
4698 | Both commands check the format of the file you specify, and append | |
4699 | the message to it in Rmail format if it is an Rmail file, and in | |
4700 | inbox file format otherwise. C-o and o are different only when you | |
4701 | specify a new file. | |
4702 | ||
4703 | ** The function `copy-face' now takes an optional fourth argument | |
4704 | NEW-FRAME. If you specify this, it copies the definition of face | |
4705 | OLD-FACE on frame FRAME to face NEW-NAME on frame NEW-FRAME. | |
4706 | ||
4707 | ** A local map can now cancel out one of the global map's menu items. | |
4708 | Just define that subcommand of the menu item with `undefined' | |
4709 | as the definition. For example, this cancels out the `Buffers' item | |
4710 | for the current major mode: | |
4711 | ||
4712 | (local-set-key [menu-bar buffer] 'undefined) | |
4713 | ||
4714 | ** To put global items at the end of the menu bar, use the new variable | |
4715 | `menu-bar-final-items'. It should be a list of symbols--event types | |
4716 | bound in the menu bar. The menu bar items for these symbols are | |
4717 | moved to the end. | |
4718 | ||
4719 | ** The list returned by `buffer-local-variables' now contains cons-cell | |
4720 | elements of the form (SYMBOL . VALUE) only for buffer-local variables | |
4721 | that have values. For unbound buffer-local variables, the variable | |
4722 | name (symbol) appears directly as an element of the list. | |
4723 | ||
4724 | ** The `modification-hooks' property of a character no longer affects | |
4725 | insertion; it runs only for deletion and modification of the character. | |
4726 | ||
4727 | To detect insertion, use `insert-in-front-hooks' and | |
4728 | `insert-behind-hooks' properties. The former runs when text is | |
4729 | inserted immediately preceding the character that has the property; | |
4730 | the latter runs when text is inserted immediately following the | |
4731 | character. | |
4732 | ||
4733 | ** Buffer modification now runs hooks belonging to overlays as well as | |
4734 | hooks belonging to characters. If an overlay has a | |
4735 | `modification-hooks' property, it applies to any change to text in the | |
4736 | overlay, and any insertion within the overlay. If the overlay has a | |
4737 | `insert-in-front-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the | |
4738 | beginning boundary of the overlay. If the overlay has an | |
4739 | `insert-behind-hooks' property, it runs for insertion at the end | |
4740 | boundary of the overlay. | |
4741 | ||
4742 | The values of these properties should be lists of functions. Each | |
4743 | function is called, receiving as arguments the overlay in question, | |
4744 | followed by the bounds of the range being modified. | |
4745 | ||
4746 | ** The new `-name NAME' option directs Emacs to search for its X | |
4747 | resources using the name `NAME', and sets the title of the initial | |
4748 | frame. This argument was added for consistency with other X clients. | |
4749 | ||
4750 | ** The new `-xrm DATABASE' option tells Emacs to treat the string | |
4751 | DATABASE as the text of an X resource database. Emacs searches | |
4752 | DATABASE for resource values, in addition to the usual places. This | |
4753 | argument was added for consistency with other X clients. | |
4754 | ||
4755 | ** Emacs now searches for X resources in the files specified by the | |
4756 | XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and XAPPLRESDIR environment | |
4757 | variables, emulating the functionality provided by programs written | |
4758 | using Xt. Because of this change, Emacs will now notice system-wide | |
4759 | application defaults files, as other X clients do. | |
4760 | ||
4761 | XFILESEARCHPATH and XUSERFILESEARCHPATH should be a list of file names | |
4762 | separated by colons; XAPPLRESDIR should be a list of directory names | |
4763 | separated by colons. | |
4764 | ||
4765 | Emacs searches for X resources | |
4766 | + specified on the command line, with the `-xrm RESOURCESTRING' | |
4767 | option, | |
4768 | + then in the value of the XENVIRONMENT environment variable, | |
4769 | - or if that is unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults-HOSTNAME if it exists | |
4770 | (where HOSTNAME is the hostname of the machine Emacs is running on), | |
4771 | + then in the screen-specific and server-wide resource properties | |
4772 | provided by the server, | |
4773 | - or if those properties are unset, in the file named ~/.Xdefaults | |
4774 | if it exists, | |
4775 | + then in the files listed in XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, | |
4776 | - or in files named LANG/Emacs in directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR | |
4777 | (where LANG is the value of the LANG environment variable), if | |
4778 | the LANG environment variable is set, | |
4779 | - or in files named Emacs in the directories listed in XAPPLRESDIR | |
4780 | - or in ~/LANG/Emacs (if the LANG environment variable is set), | |
4781 | - or in ~/Emacs, | |
4782 | + then in the files listed in XFILESEARCHPATH. | |
4783 | ||
4784 | The paths in the variables XFILESEARCHPATH, XUSERFILESEARCHPATH, and | |
4785 | XAPPLRESDIR may contain %-escapes (like the control strings passed to | |
8c1cc9e8 | 4786 | the Emacs lisp `format' function or C printf function), which Emacs expands. |
a933dad1 DL |
4787 | |
4788 | %N is replaced by the string "Emacs" wherever it occurs. | |
4789 | %T is replaced by "app-defaults" wherever it occurs. | |
4790 | %S is replaced by the empty string wherever it occurs. | |
4791 | %L and %l are replaced by the value of the LANG environment variable; if LANG | |
4792 | is not set, Emacs does not use that directory or file name at all. | |
4793 | %C is replaced by the value of the resource named "customization" | |
4794 | (class "Customization"), as retrieved from the server's resource | |
4795 | properties or the user's ~/.Xdefaults file, or the empty string if | |
4796 | that resource doesn't exist. | |
4797 | ||
4798 | So, for example, | |
4799 | if XFILESEARCHPATH is set to the value | |
4800 | "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N%C:/usr/lib/X11/%T/%N", | |
4801 | and the LANG environment variable is set to | |
4802 | "english", | |
4803 | and the customization resource is the string | |
4804 | "-color", | |
4805 | then, in the last step of the process described above, Emacs checks | |
4806 | for resources in the first of the following files that is present and | |
4807 | readable: | |
4808 | /usr/lib/X11/english/app-defaults/Emacs-color | |
4809 | /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs-color | |
4810 | /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs | |
4811 | If the LANG environment variable is not set, then Emacs never uses the | |
4812 | first element of the path, "/usr/lib/X11/%L/%T/%N%C", because it | |
4813 | contains the %L escape. | |
4814 | ||
4815 | If XFILESEARCHPATH is unset, Emacs uses the default value | |
4816 | "/usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\ | |
4817 | /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs%C:\ | |
4818 | /usr/lib/X11/%L/app-defaults/Emacs:\ | |
4819 | /usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/Emacs" | |
4820 | ||
4821 | This feature was added for consistency with other X applications. | |
4822 | ||
4823 | ** The new function `text-property-any' scans the region of text from | |
4824 | START to END to see if any character's property PROP is `eq' to | |
4825 | VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character. | |
4826 | Otherwise, it returns nil. | |
4827 | ||
4828 | The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to | |
4829 | be examined. | |
4830 | ||
4831 | ** The new function `text-property-not-all' scans the region of text from | |
4832 | START to END to see if any character's property PROP is not `eq' to | |
4833 | VALUE. If so, it returns the position of the first such character. | |
4834 | Otherwise, it returns nil. | |
4835 | ||
4836 | The optional fifth argument, OBJECT, specifies the string or buffer to | |
4837 | be examined. | |
4838 | ||
4839 | ** The function `delete-windows-on' now takes an optional second | |
4840 | argument FRAME, which specifies which frames it should affect. | |
4841 | + If FRAME is nil or omitted, then `delete-windows-on' deletes windows | |
4842 | showing BUFFER (its first argument) on all frames. | |
4843 | + If FRAME is t, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on the | |
4844 | selected frame; other frames are unaffected. | |
4845 | + If FRAME is a frame, then `delete-windows-on' only deletes windows on | |
4846 | the given frame; other frames are unaffected. | |
4847 | ||
9a21d88b | 4848 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4849 | \f |
4850 | * Changes in version 19.16. | |
4851 | ||
4852 | ** When dragging the mouse to select a region, Emacs now highlights the | |
4853 | region as you drag (if Transient Mark mode is enabled). If you | |
4854 | continue the drag beyond the boundaries of the window, Emacs scrolls | |
4855 | the window at a steady rate until you either move the mouse back into | |
4856 | the window or release the button. | |
4857 | ||
4858 | ** RET now exits `query-replace' and `query-replace-regexp'; this makes it | |
4859 | more consistent with the incremental search facility, which uses RET | |
4860 | to end the search. | |
4861 | ||
4862 | ** In C mode, C-c C-u now runs c-up-conditional. | |
4863 | C-c C-n and C-c C-p now run new commands that move forward | |
4864 | and back over balanced sets of C conditionals (c-forward-conditional | |
4865 | and c-backward-conditional). | |
4866 | ||
4867 | ** The Edit entry in the menu bar has a new alternative: | |
4868 | "Choose Next Paste". It gives you a menu showing the various | |
177c0ea7 | 4869 | strings in the kill ring; click on one to select it as the text |
a933dad1 DL |
4870 | to be yanked ("pasted") the next time you yank. |
4871 | ||
4872 | ** If you enable Transient Mark mode and set `mark-even-if-inactive' to | |
4873 | non-nil, then the region is highlighted in a transient fashion just as | |
4874 | normally in Transient Mark mode, but the mark really remains active | |
4875 | all the time; commands that use the region can be used even if the | |
4876 | region highlighting turns off. | |
4877 | ||
4878 | ** If you type C-h after a prefix key, it displays the bindings | |
4879 | that start with that prefix. | |
4880 | ||
4881 | ** The VC package now searches for version control commands in the | |
4882 | directories named by the variable `vc-path'; its value should be a | |
4883 | list of strings. | |
4884 | ||
4885 | ** If you are visiting a file that has locks registered under RCS, | |
4886 | VC now displays each lock's owner and version number in the mode line | |
4887 | after the string `RCS'. If there are no locks, VC displays the head | |
4888 | version number. | |
4889 | ||
4890 | ** When using X, if you load the `paren' library, Emacs automatically | |
4891 | underlines or highlights the matching paren whenever point is | |
4892 | next to the outside of a paren. When point is before an open-paren, | |
4893 | this shows the matching close; when point is after a close-paren, | |
4894 | this shows the matching open. | |
4895 | ||
4896 | ** The new function `define-key-after' is like `define-key', | |
4897 | but takes an extra argument AFTER. It places the newly defined | |
4898 | binding after the binding for the event AFTER. | |
4899 | ||
4900 | ** `accessible-keymaps' now takes an optional second argument, PREFIX. | |
4901 | If PREFIX is non-nil, it means the value should include only maps for | |
4902 | keys that start with PREFIX. | |
4903 | ||
4904 | `describe-bindings' also accepts an optional argument PREFIX which | |
4905 | means to describe only the keys that start with PREFIX. | |
4906 | ||
4907 | ** The variable `prefix-help-command' hold a command to run to display help | |
4908 | whenever the character `help-char' follows a prefix key and does not have | |
4909 | a key binding in that context. | |
4910 | ||
4911 | ** Emacs now detects double- and triple-mouse clicks. A single mouse | |
4912 | click produces a pair events of the form: | |
4913 | (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4914 | (mouse-N POSITION) | |
4915 | Clicking the same mouse button again, soon thereafter and at the same | |
4916 | location, produces another pair of events of the form: | |
4917 | (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4918 | (double-mouse-N POSITION 2) | |
4919 | Another click will produce an event pair of the form: | |
4920 | (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4921 | (triple-mouse-N POSITION 3) | |
4922 | All the POSITIONs in such a sequence would be identical, except for | |
4923 | their timestamps. | |
4924 | ||
4925 | To count as double- and triple-clicks, mouse clicks must be at the | |
4926 | same location as the first click, and the number of milliseconds | |
4927 | between the first release and the second must be less than the value | |
4928 | of the lisp variable `double-click-time'. Setting `double-click-time' | |
4929 | to nil disables multi-click detection. Setting it to t removes the | |
4930 | time limit; Emacs then detects multi-clicks by position only. | |
4931 | ||
4932 | If `read-key-sequence' finds no binding for a double-click event, but | |
4933 | the corresponding single-click event would be bound, | |
4934 | `read-key-sequence' demotes it to a single-click. Similarly, it | |
4935 | demotes unbound triple-clicks to double- or single-clicks. This means | |
4936 | you don't have to distinguish between single- and multi-clicks if you | |
4937 | don't want to. | |
4938 | ||
4939 | Emacs reports all clicks after the third as `triple-mouse-N' clicks, | |
4940 | but increments the click count after POSITION. For example, a fourth | |
4941 | click, soon after the third and at the same location, produces a pair | |
4942 | of events of the form: | |
4943 | (down-mouse-N POSITION) | |
4944 | (triple-mouse-N POSITION 4) | |
4945 | ||
4946 | ** The way Emacs reports positions of mouse events has changed | |
4947 | slightly. If a mouse event includes a position list of the form: | |
4948 | (WINDOW (PLACE-SYMBOL) (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP) | |
4949 | this denotes exactly the same position as the list: | |
4950 | (WINDOW PLACE-SYMBOL (COLUMN . ROW) TIMESTAMP) | |
4951 | That is, the event occurred over a non-textual area of the frame, | |
4952 | specified by PLACE-SYMBOL, a symbol like `mode-line' or | |
4953 | `vertical-scroll-bar'. | |
4954 | ||
4955 | Enclosing PLACE-SYMBOL in a singleton list does not change the | |
4956 | position denoted, but the `read-key-sequence' function uses the | |
4957 | presence or absence of the singleton list to tell whether or not it | |
4958 | should prefix the event with its place symbol. | |
4959 | ||
4960 | Normally, `read-key-sequence' prefixes mouse events occurring over | |
4961 | non-textual areas with their PLACE-SYMBOLs, to select the sub-keymap | |
4962 | appropriate for the event; for example, clicking on the mode line | |
4963 | produces a sequence like | |
4964 | [mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)] | |
4965 | However, if lisp code elects to unread the resulting key sequence by | |
4966 | placing it in the `unread-command-events' variable, it is important | |
4967 | that `read-key-sequence' not insert the prefix symbol again; that | |
4968 | would produce a malformed key sequence like | |
4969 | [mode-line mode-line (mouse-1 POSN)] | |
4970 | For this reason, `read-key-sequence' encloses the event's PLACE-SYMBOL | |
4971 | in a singleton list when it first inserts the prefix, but doesn't | |
4972 | insert the prefix when processing events whose PLACE-SYMBOLs are | |
4973 | already thus enclosed. | |
4974 | ||
9a21d88b | 4975 | |
a933dad1 DL |
4976 | \f |
4977 | * Changes in version 19.15. | |
4978 | ||
4979 | ** `make-frame-visible', which uniconified frames, is now a command, | |
4980 | and thus may be bound to a key. This makes sense because frames | |
4981 | respond to user input while iconified. | |
4982 | ||
4983 | ** You can now use Meta mouse clicks to set and use the "secondary | |
4984 | selection". You can drag M-Mouse-1 across the region you want to | |
4985 | select. Or you can press M-Mouse-1 at one end and M-Mouse-3 at the | |
4986 | other (this also copies the text to the kill ring). Repeating M-Mouse-3 | |
4987 | again at the same place kills that text. | |
4988 | ||
4989 | M-Mouse-2 kills the secondary selection. | |
4990 | ||
4991 | Setting the secondary selection does not move point or the mark. It | |
4992 | is possible to make a secondary selection that does not all fit on the | |
4993 | screen, by using M-Mouse-1 at one end, scrolling, then using M-Mouse-3 | |
4994 | at the other end. | |
4995 | ||
4996 | Emacs has only one secondary selection at any time. Starting to set | |
4997 | a new one cancels any previous one. The secondary selection displays | |
4998 | using a face named `secondary-selection'. | |
4999 | ||
5000 | ** There's a new way to request use of Supercite (sc.el). Do this: | |
5001 | ||
5002 | (add-hook 'mail-citation-hook 'sc-cite-original) | |
5003 | ||
5004 | Currently this works with Rmail. In the future, other Emacs based | |
5005 | mail-readers should be modified to understand this hook also. | |
5006 | In the mean time, you should keep doing what you have done in the past | |
5007 | for those other mail readers. | |
5008 | ||
5009 | ** When a regular expression contains `\(...\)' inside a repetition | |
5010 | operator such as `*' or `+', and you ask about the range that was matched | |
5011 | using `match-beginning' and `match-end', the range you get corresponds | |
5012 | to the *last* repetition *only*. In Emacs 18, you would get a range | |
5013 | corresponding to all the repetitions. | |
5014 | ||
5015 | If you want to get a range corresponding to all the repetitions, | |
5016 | put a `\(...\)' grouping *outside* the repetition operator. This | |
5017 | is the syntax that corresponds logically to the desired result, and | |
5018 | it works the same in Emacs 18 and Emacs 19. | |
5019 | ||
5020 | (This change actually took place earlier, but we didn't know about it | |
5021 | and thus didn't document it.) | |
9a21d88b KS |
5022 | |
5023 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5024 | \f |
5025 | * Changes in version 19.14. | |
5026 | ||
5027 | ** To modify read-only text, bind the variable `inhibit-read-only' | |
5028 | to a non-nil value. If the value is t, then all reasons that might | |
5029 | make text read-only are inhibited (including `read-only' text properties). | |
5030 | If the value is a list, then a `read-only' property is inhibited | |
5031 | if it is `memq' in the list. | |
5032 | ||
5033 | ** If you call `get-buffer-window' passing t as its second argument, it | |
5034 | will only search for windows on visible frames. Previously, passing t | |
5035 | as the secord argument caused `get-buffer-window' to search all | |
5036 | frames, visible or not. | |
5037 | ||
5038 | ** If you call `other-buffer' with a nil or omitted second argument, it | |
5039 | will ignore buffers displayed windows on any visible frame, not just | |
5040 | the selected frame. | |
5041 | ||
5042 | ** You can specify a window or a frame for C-x # to use when | |
5043 | selects a server buffer. Set the variable server-window | |
5044 | to the window or frame that you want. | |
5045 | ||
5046 | ** The command M-( now inserts spaces outside the open-parentheses in | |
5047 | some cases--depending on the syntax classes of the surrounding | |
5048 | characters. If the variable `parens-dont-require-spaces' is non-nil, | |
5049 | it inhibits insertion of these spaces. | |
5050 | ||
5051 | ** The GUD package now supports the debugger known as xdb on HP/UX | |
5052 | systems. Use M-x xdb. The variable `gud-xdb-directories' lets you | |
5053 | specify a list of directories to search for source code. | |
5054 | ||
5055 | ** If you are using the mailabbrev package, you should note that its | |
5056 | function for defining an alias is now called `define-mail-abbrev'. | |
5057 | This package no longer contains a definition for `define-mail-alias'; | |
5058 | that name is used only in mailaliases. | |
5059 | ||
5060 | ** Inserted characters now inherit the properties of the text before | |
5061 | them, by default, rather than those of the following text. | |
5062 | ||
5063 | ** The function `insert-file-contents' now takes optional arguments BEG | |
5064 | and END that specify which part of the file to insert. BEG defaults to | |
5065 | 0 (the beginning of the file), and END defaults to the end of the file. | |
5066 | ||
5067 | If you specify BEG or END, then the argument VISIT must be nil. | |
9a21d88b KS |
5068 | |
5069 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5070 | \f |
5071 | * Changes in version 19.13. | |
5072 | ||
5073 | ** Magic file names can now handle the `load' operation. | |
5074 | ||
5075 | ** Bibtex mode now sets up special entries in the menu bar. | |
5076 | ||
5077 | ** The incremental search commands C-w and C-y, which copy text from | |
5078 | the buffer into the search string, now convert it to lower case | |
5079 | if you are in a case-insensitive search. This is to avoid making | |
5080 | the search a case-sensitive one. | |
5081 | ||
5082 | ** GNUS now knows your time zone automatically if Emacs does. | |
5083 | ||
5084 | ** Hide-ifdef mode no longer defines keys of the form | |
5085 | C-c LETTER, since those keys are reserved for users. | |
5086 | Those commands have been moved to C-c M-LETTER. | |
5087 | We may move them again for greater consistency with other modes. | |
9a21d88b KS |
5088 | |
5089 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5090 | \f |
5091 | * Changes in version 19.12. | |
5092 | ||
5093 | ** You can now make many of the sort commands ignore case by setting | |
5094 | `sort-fold-case' to a non-nil value. | |
9a21d88b KS |
5095 | |
5096 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5097 | \f |
5098 | * Changes in version 19.11. | |
5099 | ||
5100 | ** Supercite is installed. | |
5101 | ||
5102 | ** `write-file-hooks' functions that return non-nil are responsible | |
5103 | for making a backup file if you want that to be done. | |
5104 | To do so, execute the following code: | |
5105 | ||
5106 | (or buffer-backed-up (backup-buffer)) | |
5107 | ||
5108 | You might wish to save the file modes value returned by | |
5109 | `backup-buffer' and use that to set the mode bits of the file | |
5110 | that you write. This is what `basic-save-buffer' does when | |
5111 | it writes a file in the usual way. | |
5112 | ||
5113 | (This is not actually new, but wasn't documented before.) | |
9a21d88b KS |
5114 | |
5115 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5116 | \f |
5117 | * Changes in version 19.10. | |
5118 | ||
5119 | ** The command `repeat-complex-command' is now on C-x ESC ESC. | |
5120 | It used to be bound to C-x ESC. | |
5121 | ||
5122 | The reason for this change is to make function keys work after C-x. | |
5123 | ||
5124 | ** The variable `highlight-nonselected-windows' now controls whether | |
5125 | the region is highlighted in windows other than the selected window | |
5126 | (in Transient Mark mode only, of course, and currently only when | |
5127 | using X). | |
9a21d88b KS |
5128 | |
5129 | ||
a933dad1 DL |
5130 | \f |
5131 | * Changes in version 19.8. | |
5132 | ||
5133 | ** It is now simpler to tell Emacs to display accented characters under | |
5134 | X windows. M-x standard-display-european toggles the display of | |
5135 | buffer text according to the ISO Latin-1 standard. With a prefix | |
d95b32a4 GM |
5136 | argument, this command enables European character display if and only |
5137 | if the argument is positive. | |
a933dad1 DL |
5138 | |
5139 | ** The `-i' command-line argument tells Emacs to use a picture of the | |
5140 | GNU gnu as its icon, instead of letting the window manager choose an | |
5141 | icon for it. This option used to insert a file into the current | |
5142 | buffer; use `-insert' to do that now. | |
5143 | ||
5144 | ** The `configure' script now supports `--prefix' and `--exec-prefix' | |
5145 | options. | |
5146 | ||
5147 | The `--prefix=PREFIXDIR' option specifies where the installation process | |
5148 | should put emacs and its data files. This defaults to `/usr/local'. | |
5149 | - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in PREFIXDIR/bin | |
5150 | (unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise). | |
5151 | - The architecture-independent files go in PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION | |
5152 | (where VERSION is the version number of Emacs, like `19.7'). | |
5153 | - The architecture-dependent files go in | |
5154 | PREFIXDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION | |
5155 | (where CONFIGURATION is the configuration name, like mips-dec-ultrix4.2), | |
5156 | unless the `--exec-prefix' option says otherwise. | |
5157 | ||
5158 | The `--exec-prefix=EXECDIR' option allows you to specify a separate | |
5159 | portion of the directory tree for installing architecture-specific | |
5160 | files, like executables and utility programs. If specified, | |
5161 | - Emacs (and the other utilities users run) go in EXECDIR/bin, and | |
5162 | - The architecture-dependent files go in | |
5163 | EXECDIR/lib/emacs/VERSION/CONFIGURATION. | |
5164 | EXECDIR/bin should be a directory that is normally in users' PATHs. | |
5165 | ||
5166 | ** When running under X, the new lisp function `x-list-fonts' | |
5167 | allows code to find out which fonts are available from the X server. | |
5168 | The first argument PATTERN is a string, perhaps with wildcard characters; | |
5169 | the * character matches any substring, and | |
5170 | the ? character matches any single character. | |
5171 | PATTERN is case-insensitive. | |
5172 | If the optional arguments FACE and FRAME are specified, then | |
5173 | `x-list-fonts' returns only fonts the same size as FACE on FRAME. | |
5174 | ||
5175 | ||
5176 | \f | |
5177 | * Changes in version 19. | |
5178 | ||
5179 | ** When you kill buffers, Emacs now returns memory to the operating system, | |
5180 | thus reducing the size of the Emacs process. All the space that you free | |
5181 | up by killing buffers can now be reused for other buffers no matter what | |
5182 | their sizes, or reused by other processes if Emacs doesn't need it. | |
5183 | ||
5184 | ** Emacs now does garbage collection and auto saving while it is waiting | |
5185 | for input, which often avoids the need to do these things while you | |
5186 | are typing. | |
5187 | ||
5188 | The variable `auto-save-timeout' says how many seconds Emacs should | |
5189 | wait, after you stop typing, before it does an auto save and a garbage | |
5190 | collection. | |
5191 | ||
5192 | ** If auto saving detects that a buffer has shrunk greatly, it refrains | |
5193 | from auto saving that buffer and displays a warning. Now it also turns | |
5194 | off Auto Save mode in that buffer, so that you won't get the same | |
5195 | warning again. | |
5196 | ||
5197 | If you reenable Auto Save mode in that buffer, Emacs will start saving | |
5198 | it again with no further warnings. | |
5199 | ||
5200 | ** A new minor mode called Line Number mode displays the current line | |
5201 | number in the mode line, updating it as necessary when you move | |
5202 | point. | |
5203 | ||
5204 | However, if the buffer is very large (larger than the value of | |
5205 | `line-number-display-limit'), then the line number doesn't appear. | |
5206 | This is because computing the line number can be painfully slow if the | |
5207 | buffer is very large. | |
5208 | ||
5209 | ** You can quit while Emacs is waiting to read or write files. | |
5210 | ||
5211 | ** The arrow keys now have default bindings to move in the appropriate | |
177c0ea7 | 5212 | directions. |
a933dad1 DL |
5213 | |
5214 | ** You can suppress next-line's habit of inserting a newline when | |
5215 | called at the end of a buffer by setting next-line-add-newlines to nil | |
5216 | (it defaults to t). | |
5217 | ||
5218 | ** You can now get back recent minibuffer inputs conveniently. While | |
5219 | in the minibuffer, type M-p to fetch the next earlier minibuffer | |
5220 | input, and use M-n to fetch the next later input. | |
5221 | ||
5222 | There are also commands to search forward or backward through the | |
5223 | history for history elements that match a regular expression. M-r | |
5224 | searches older elements in the history, while M-s searches newer | |
5225 | elements. By special dispensation, these commands can always use the | |
5226 | minibuffer to read their arguments even though you are already in the | |
5227 | minibuffer when you issue them. | |
5228 | ||
5229 | The history feature is available for all uses of the minibuffer, but | |
5230 | there are separate history lists for different kinds of input. For | |
5231 | example, there is a list for file names, used by all the commands that | |
5232 | read file names. There is a list for arguments of commands like | |
5233 | `query-replace'. There are also very specific history lists, such | |
5234 | as the one that `compile' uses for compilation commands. | |
5235 | ||
5236 | ** You can now display text in a mixture of fonts and colors, using the | |
5237 | "face" feature, together with the overlay and text property features. | |
5238 | See the Emacs Lisp manual for details. The Emacs Users Manual describes | |
5239 | how to change the colors and font of standard predefined faces. | |
5240 | ||
5241 | ** You can refer to files on other machines using special file name syntax: | |
5242 | ||
5243 | /HOST:FILENAME | |
5244 | /USER@HOST:FILENAME | |
5245 | ||
5246 | When you do this, Emacs uses the FTP program to read and write files on | |
5247 | the specified host. It logs in through FTP using your user name or the | |
5248 | name USER. It may ask you for a password from time to time; this | |
5249 | is used for logging in on HOST. | |
5250 | ||
5251 | ** Some C-x key bindings have been moved onto new prefix keys. | |
5252 | ||
5253 | C-x r is a prefix for registers and rectangles. | |
5254 | C-x n is a prefix for narrowing. | |
5255 | C-x a is a prefix for abbrev commands. | |
5256 | ||
5257 | C-x r C-SPC | |
5258 | C-x r SPC point-to-register (Was C-x /) | |
5259 | C-x r j jump-to-register (Was C-x j) | |
5260 | C-x r s copy-to-register (Was C-x x) | |
5261 | C-x r i insert-register (Was C-x g) | |
5262 | C-x r r copy-rectangle-to-register (Was C-x r) | |
5263 | C-x r k kill-rectangle | |
5264 | C-x r y yank-rectangle | |
5265 | C-x r o open-rectangle | |
5266 | C-x r f frame-configuration-to-register | |
5267 | (This saves the state of all windows in all frames.) | |
5268 | C-x r w window-configuration-to-register | |
5269 | (This saves the state of all windows in the selected frame.) | |
5270 | ||
5271 | (Use C-x r j to restore a configuration saved with C-x r f or C-x r w.) | |
5272 | ||
5273 | C-x n n narrow-to-region (Was C-x n) | |
5274 | C-x n p narrow-to-page (Was C-x p) | |
5275 | C-x n w widen (Was C-x w) | |
5276 | ||
5277 | C-x a l add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-a) | |
5278 | C-x a g add-global-abbrev (Was C-x +) | |
5279 | C-x a i l inverse-add-mode-abbrev (Was C-x C-h) | |
5280 | C-x a i g inverse-add-global-abbrev (Was C-x -) | |
5281 | C-x a e expand-abbrev (Was C-x ') | |
5282 | ||
5283 | (The old key bindings C-x /, C-x j, C-x x and C-x g | |
5284 | have not yet been removed.) | |
5285 | ||
5286 | ** You can put a file name in a register to be able to visit the file | |
5287 | quickly. Do this: | |
5288 | ||
5289 | (set-register ?CHAR '(file . NAME)) | |
5290 | ||
5291 | where NAME is the file name as a string. Then C-x r j CHAR finds that | |
5292 | file. | |
5293 | ||
5294 | This is useful for files that you need to visit frequently, | |
5295 | but that you don't want to keep in buffers all the time. | |
5296 | ||
5297 | ** The keys M-g (fill-region) and C-x a (append-to-buffer) | |
5298 | have been eliminated. | |
5299 | ||
5300 | ** The new command `string-rectangle' inserts a specified string on | |
5301 | each line of the region-rectangle. | |
5302 | ||
5303 | ** C-x 4 r is now `find-file-read-only-other-window'. | |
5304 | ||
5305 | ** C-x 4 C-o is now `display-buffer', which displays a specified buffer | |
5306 | in another window without selecting it. | |
5307 | ||
5308 | ** Picture mode has been substantially improved. The picture editing commands | |
5309 | now arrange for automatic horizontal scrolling to keep point visible | |
5310 | when editing a wide buffer with truncate-lines on. Picture-mode | |
5311 | initialization now does a better job of rebinding standard commands; | |
5312 | it finds not just their normal keybindings, but any function keys | |
5313 | attached to them. | |
5314 | ||
5315 | ** If you enable Transient Mark mode, then the mark becomes "inactive" | |
5316 | after every command that modifies the buffer. While the mark is | |
5317 | active, the region is highlighted (under X, at least). Most commands | |
5318 | that use the mark give an error if the mark is inactive, but you can | |
5319 | use C-x C-x to make it active again. This feature is also sometimes | |
5320 | known as "Zmacs mode". | |
5321 | ||
5322 | ** Outline mode is now available as a minor mode. This minor mode can | |
5323 | combine with any major mode; it substitutes the C-c commands of | |
5324 | Outline mode for those of the major mode. Use M-x outline-minor-mode | |
5325 | to enable and disable the new mode. | |
5326 | ||
5327 | M-x outline-mode is unchanged; it still switches to Outline mode as a | |
5328 | major mode. | |
5329 | ||
5330 | ** The default setting of `version-control' comes from the environment | |
5331 | variable VERSION_CONTROL. | |
5332 | ||
5333 | ** The user option for controlling whether files can set local | |
5334 | variables is now called `enable-local-variables'. A value of t means | |
5335 | local-variables lists are obeyed; nil means they are ignored; anything | |
5336 | else means query the user. | |
5337 | ||
5338 | The user option for controlling use of the `eval' local variable is | |
5339 | now called is `enable-local-eval'; its values are interpreted like | |
5340 | those of `enable-local-variables'. | |
5341 | ||
5342 | ** X Window System changes: | |
5343 | ||
5344 | C-x 5 C-f and C-x 5 b switch to a specified file or buffer in a new | |
5345 | frame. Likewise, C-x 5 m starts outgoing mail in another frame, and | |
5346 | C-x 5 . finds a tag in another frame. | |
5347 | ||
5348 | When you are using X, C-z now iconifies the selected frame. | |
5349 | ||
5350 | Emacs can now exchange text with other X applications. Killing or | |
5351 | copying text in Emacs now makes that text available for pasting into | |
5352 | other X applications. The Emacs yanking commands now insert the | |
5353 | latest selection set by other applications, and add the text to the | |
5354 | kill ring. The Emacs commands for selecting and inserting text with | |
5355 | the mouse now use the kill ring in the same way the keyboard killing | |
5356 | and yanking commands do. | |
5357 | ||
5358 | The option to specify the title for the initial frame is now `-name NAME'. | |
5359 | There is currently no way to specify an icon title; perhaps we will add | |
5360 | one in the future. | |
5361 | ||
5362 | ** Undoing a deletion now puts point back where it was before the | |
5363 | deletion. | |
5364 | ||
5365 | ** The variables that control how much undo information to save have | |
5366 | been renamed to `undo-limit' and `undo-strong-limit'. They used to be | |
5367 | called `undo-threshold' and `undo-high-threshold'. | |
5368 | ||
5369 | ** You can now use kill commands in read-only buffers. They don't | |
5370 | actually change the buffer, and Emacs will beep and warn you that the | |
5371 | buffer is read-only, but they do copy the text you tried to kill into | |
5372 | the kill ring, so you can yank it into other buffers. | |
5373 | ||
5374 | ** C-o inserts the fill-prefix on the newly created line. The command | |
5375 | M-^ deletes the prefix (if it occurs) after the newline that it | |
5376 | deletes. | |
5377 | ||
5378 | ** C-M-l now runs the command `reposition-window'. It scrolls the | |
5379 | window heuristically in a way designed to get useful information onto | |
5380 | the screen. | |
5381 | ||
5382 | ** C-M-r is now reverse incremental regexp search. | |
5383 | ||
5384 | ** M-z now kills through the target character. In version 18, it | |
5385 | killed up to but not including the target character. | |
5386 | ||
5387 | ** M-! now runs the specified shell command asynchronously if it | |
5388 | ends in `&' (just as the shell does). | |
5389 | ||
5390 | ** C-h C-f and C-h C-k are new help commands that display the Info | |
5391 | node for a given Emacs function name or key sequence, respectively. | |
5392 | ||
5393 | ** The C-h p command system lets you find Emacs Lisp packages by | |
5394 | topic keywords. Here is a partial list of package categories: | |
5395 | ||
5396 | abbrev abbreviation handling, typing shortcuts, macros | |
5397 | bib code related to the bib bibliography processor | |
5398 | c C and C++ language support | |
5399 | calendar calendar and time management support | |
5400 | comm communications, networking, remote access to files | |
5401 | docs support for Emacs documentation | |
5402 | emulations emulations of other editors | |
5403 | extensions Emacs Lisp language extensions | |
5404 | games games, jokes and amusements | |
5405 | hardware support for interfacing with exotic hardware | |
5406 | help support for on-line help systems | |
5407 | i14n internationalization and alternate character-set support | |
5408 | internal code for Emacs internals, build process, defaults | |
5409 | languages specialized modes for editing programming languages | |
5410 | lisp Lisp support, including Emacs Lisp | |
5411 | local code local to your site | |
5412 | maint maintenance aids for the Emacs development group | |
5413 | mail modes for electronic-mail handling | |
5414 | news support for netnews reading and posting | |
5415 | processes process, subshell, compilation, and job control support | |
5416 | terminals support for terminal types | |
5417 | tex code related to the TeX formatter | |
5418 | tools programming tools | |
5419 | unix front-ends/assistants for, or emulators of, UNIX features | |
5420 | vms support code for vms | |
5421 | wp word processing | |
5422 | ||
5423 | More will be added soon. | |
5424 | ||
5425 | ** The command to split a window into two side-by-side windows is now | |
5426 | C-x 3. It was C-x 5. | |
5427 | ||
5428 | ** M-. (find-tag) no longer has any effect on what M-, will do | |
5429 | subsequently. You can no longer use M-, to find the next similar tag; | |
5430 | you must use M-. with a prefix argument, instead. | |
5431 | ||
5432 | The motive for this change is so that you can more reliably use | |
5433 | M-, to resume a suspended `tags-search' or `tags-query-replace'. | |
5434 | ||
5435 | ** C-x s (`save-some-buffers') now gives you more options when it asks | |
5436 | whether to save a particular buffer. In addition to `y' or `n', you | |
5437 | can answer `!' to save all the remaining buffers, `.' to save this | |
5438 | buffer but not save any others, ESC to stop saving and exit the | |
177c0ea7 | 5439 | command, and C-h to get help. These options are analogous to those |
a933dad1 DL |
5440 | of `query-replace'. |
5441 | ||
5442 | ** M-x make-symbolic-link does not expand its first argument. | |
5443 | This lets you make a link with a target that is a relative file name. | |
5444 | ||
5445 | ** M-x add-change-log-entry and C-x 4 a now automatically insert the | |
5446 | name of the file and often the name of the function that you changed. | |
5447 | They also handle grouping of entries. | |
5448 | ||
5449 | There is now a special major mode for editing ChangeLog files. It | |
5450 | makes filling work conveniently. Each bunch of grouped entries is one | |
5451 | paragraph, and each collection of entries from one person on one day | |
5452 | is considered a page. | |
5453 | ||
5454 | ** The `comment-region' command adds comment delimiters to the lines that | |
5455 | start in the region, thus commenting them out. With a negative argument, | |
5456 | it deletes comment delimiters from the lines in the region--this cancels | |
5457 | the effect of `comment-region' without an argument. | |
5458 | ||
5459 | With a positive argument, `comment-region' adds comment delimiters | |
5460 | but duplicates the last character of the comment start sequence as many | |
5461 | times as the argument specifies. This is a way of calling attention to | |
5462 | the comment. In Lisp, you should use an argument at least two, because | |
5463 | the indentation convention for single semicolon comments does not leave | |
5464 | them at the beginning of a line. | |
5465 | ||
5466 | ** If `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil, C-x 2 tries to avoid | |
5467 | shifting any text on the screen by putting point in whichever window | |
5468 | happens to contain the screen line the cursor is already on. | |
5469 | The default is that `split-window-keep-point' is non-nil on slow | |
5470 | terminals. | |
5471 | ||
5472 | ** M-x super-apropos is like M-x apropos except that it searches both | |
5473 | Lisp symbol names and documentation strings for matches. It describes | |
5474 | every symbol that has a match in either the symbol's name or its | |
5475 | documentation. | |
5476 | ||
5477 | Both M-x apropos and M-x super-apropos take an optional second | |
5478 | argument DO-ALL which controls the more expensive part of the job. | |
5479 | This includes looking up and printing the key bindings of all | |
5480 | commands. It also includes checking documentation strings in | |
5481 | super-apropos. DO-ALL is nil by default; use a prefix arg to make it | |
5482 | non-nil. | |
5483 | ||
5484 | ** M-x revert-buffer no longer offers to revert from a recent auto-save | |
5485 | file unless you give it a prefix argument. Otherwise it always | |
5486 | reverts from the real file regardless of whether there has been an | |
5487 | auto-save since thenm. (Reverting from the auto-save file is no longer | |
5488 | very useful now that the undo capacity is larger.) | |
5489 | ||
5490 | ** M-x recover-file no longer turns off Auto Save mode when it reads | |
5491 | the last Auto Save file. | |
5492 | ||
5493 | ** M-x rename-buffer, if you give it a prefix argument, | |
5494 | avoids errors by modifying the new name to make it unique. | |
5495 | ||
5496 | ** M-x rename-uniquely renames the current buffer to a similar name | |
5497 | with a numeric suffix added to make it both different and unique. | |
5498 | ||
5499 | One use of this command is for creating multiple shell buffers. | |
5500 | If you rename your shell buffer, and then do M-x shell again, it | |
5501 | makes a new shell buffer. This method is also good for mail buffers, | |
5502 | compilation buffers, and any Emacs feature which creates a special | |
5503 | buffer with a particular name. | |
5504 | ||
5505 | ** M-x compare-windows with a prefix argument ignores changes in whitespace. | |
5506 | If `compare-ignore-case' is non-nil, then differences in case are also | |
5507 | ignored. | |
5508 | ||
5509 | ** `backward-paragraph' is now bound to M-{ by default, and `forward-paragraph' | |
5510 | to M-}. Originally, these commands were bound to M-[ and M-], but they were | |
5511 | running into conflicts with the use of function keys. On many terminals, | |
5512 | function keys send a sequence beginning ESC-[, so many users have defined this | |
5513 | as a prefix key. | |
5514 | ||
5515 | ** C-x C-u (upcase-region) and C-x C-l (downcase-region) are now disabled by | |
5516 | default; these commands seem to be often hit by accident, and can be | |
5517 | quite destructive if their effects are not noticed immediately. | |
5518 | ||
5519 | ** The function `erase-buffer' is now interactive, but disabled by default. | |
5520 | ||
5521 | ** When visiting a new file, Emacs attempts to abbreviate the file's | |
5522 | path using the symlinks listed in `directory-abbrev-alist'. | |
5523 | ||
5524 | ** When you visit the same file in under two names that translate into | |
5525 | the same name once symbolic links are handled, Emacs warns you that | |
5526 | you have two buffers for the same file. | |
5527 | ||
5528 | ** If you wish to avoid visiting the same file in two buffers under | |
5529 | different names, set the variable `find-file-existing-other-name' | |
5530 | non-nil. Then `find-file' uses the existing buffer visiting the file, | |
5531 | no matter which of the file's names you specify. | |
5532 | ||
5533 | ** If you set `find-file-visit-truename' non-nil, then the file name | |
5534 | recorded for a buffer is the file's truename (in which all symbolic | |
5535 | links have been removed), rather than the name you specify. Setting | |
5536 | `find-file-visit-truename' also implies the effect of | |
5537 | `find-file-existing-other-name'. | |
5538 | ||
5539 | ** C-x C-v now inserts the entire current file name in the minibuffer. | |
5540 | This is convenient if you made a small mistake in typing it. Point | |
5541 | goes after the last slash, before the last file name component, so if | |
5542 | you want to replace it entirely, you can use C-k right away to delete | |
5543 | it. | |
5544 | ||
5545 | ** Commands such as C-M-f in Lisp mode now ignore parentheses within comments. | |
5546 | ||
5547 | ** C-x q now uses ESC to terminate all iterations of the keyboard | |
5548 | macro, rather than C-d as before. | |
5549 | ||
5550 | ** Use the command `setenv' to set an individual environment variable | |
5551 | for Emacs subprocesses. Specify a variable name and a value, both as | |
5552 | strings. This command applies only to subprocesses yet to be | |
5553 | started. | |
5554 | ||
5555 | ** Use `rot13-other-window' to examine a buffer with rot13. | |
5556 | ||
5557 | This command does not change the text in the buffer. Instead, it | |
5558 | creates a window with a funny display table that applies the code when | |
5559 | displaying the text. | |
5560 | ||
5561 | ** The command `M-x version' now prints the current Emacs version; The | |
5562 | `version' command is an alias for the `emacs-version' command. | |
5563 | ||
5564 | ** More complex changes in existing packages. | |
5565 | ||
5566 | *** `fill-nonuniform-paragraphs' is a new command, much like | |
5567 | `fill-individual-paragraphs' except that only separator lines separate | |
5568 | paragraphs. Since this means that the lines of one paragraph may have | |
5569 | different amounts of indentation, the fill prefix used is the smallest | |
5570 | amount of indentation of any of the lines of the paragraph. | |
5571 | ||
5572 | *** Filling is now partially controlled by a new minor mode, Adaptive | |
5573 | Fill mode. When this mode is enabled (and it is enabled by default), | |
5574 | if you use M-x fill-region-as-paragraph on an indented paragraph and | |
5575 | you don't have a fill prefix, it uses the indentation of the second | |
5576 | line of the paragraph as the fill prefix. | |
5577 | ||
5578 | Adaptive Fill mode doesn't have much effect on M-q in most major | |
5579 | modes, because an indented line will probably count as a paragraph | |
5580 | starter and thus each line of an indented paragraph will be considered | |
5581 | a paragraph of its own. | |
5582 | ||
5583 | *** M-q in C mode now runs `c-fill-paragraph', which is designed | |
5584 | for filling C comments. (We assume you don't want to fill | |
5585 | the code in a C program.) | |
5586 | ||
5587 | *** M-$ now runs the Ispell program instead of the Unix spell program. | |
5588 | ||
5589 | M-$ starts an Ispell process the first time you use it. But the process | |
5590 | stays alive, so that subsequent uses of M-$ run very fast. | |
5591 | If you want to get rid of the process, use M-x kill-ispell. | |
5592 | ||
5593 | To check the entire current buffer, use M-x ispell-buffer. | |
5594 | Use M-x ispell-region to check just the current region. | |
5595 | ||
5596 | Ispell commands often involve interactive replacement of words. | |
5597 | You can interrupt the interactive replacement with C-g. | |
5598 | You can restart it again afterward with C-u M-$. | |
5599 | ||
5600 | During interactive replacement, you can type the following characters: | |
5601 | ||
5602 | a Accept this word this time. | |
5603 | DIGIT Replace the word (this time) with one of the displayed near-misses. | |
5604 | The digit you use says which near-miss to use. | |
5605 | i Insert this word in your private dictionary | |
5606 | so that Ispell will consider it correct it from now on. | |
5607 | r Replace the word this time with a string typed by you. | |
5608 | ||
5609 | When the Ispell process starts, it reads your private dictionary which | |
5610 | is the file `~/ispell.words'. If you "insert" words with the `i' command, | |
5611 | these words are added to that file, but not right away--only at the end | |
5612 | of the interactive replacement process. | |
5613 | ||
5614 | Use M-x reload-ispell to reload your private dictionary from | |
5615 | `~/ispell.words' if you edit it outside of Ispell. | |
5616 | ||
5617 | ** Changes in existing modes. | |
5618 | ||
5619 | *** gdb-mode has been replaced by gud-mode. | |
5620 | ||
5621 | The package gud.el (Grand Unified Debugger) replaces gdb.el in Emacs | |
5622 | 19. It provides a gdb.el-like interface to any of three debuggers; | |
5623 | gdb itself, the sdb debugger supported on some Unix systems, or the | |
5624 | dbx debugger on Berkeley systems. | |
5625 | ||
5626 | You start it up with one of the commands M-x gdb, M-x sdb, or | |
5627 | M-x dbx. Each entry point finishes by executing a hook; gdb-mode-hook, | |
5628 | sdb-mode-hook or dbx-mode-hook respectively. | |
5629 | ||
5630 | These bindings have changed: | |
5631 | C-x C-a > gud-down (was M-d) | |
5632 | C-x C-a < gud-up (was M-u) | |
5633 | C-x C-a C-r gud-cont (was M-c) | |
5634 | C-x C-a C-n gud-next (was M-n) | |
5635 | C-x C-a C-s gud-step (was M-s) | |
5636 | C-x C-a C-i gud-stepi (was M-i) | |
5637 | C-x C-a C-l gud-recenter (was C-l) | |
5638 | C-d comint-delchar-or-maybe-eof (was C-c C-d) | |
5639 | ||
5640 | These bindings have been removed: | |
5641 | C-c C-r (was comint-show-output; now gud-cont) | |
5642 | ||
5643 | Since GUD mode uses comint, it uses comint's input history commands, | |
5644 | superseding C-c C-y (copy-last-shell-input): | |
5645 | M-p comint-next-input | |
5646 | M-n comint-previous-input | |
5647 | M-r comint-previous-similar-input | |
5648 | M-s comint-next-similar-input | |
5649 | M-C-r comint-previous-input-matching | |
5650 | ||
5651 | The C-x C-a bindings are also active in source files. | |
5652 | ||
5653 | *** The old TeX mode bindings of M-{ and M-} have been moved to C-c { | |
5654 | and C-c }. (These commands are `up-list' and `tex-insert-braces'; | |
177c0ea7 | 5655 | they are the TeX equivalents of M-( and M-).) This is because M-{ |
a933dad1 DL |
5656 | and M-} are now globally defined commands. |
5657 | ||
5658 | *** Changes in Mail mode. | |
5659 | ||
5660 | `%' is now a word-separator character in Mail mode. | |
5661 | ||
5662 | `mail-signature', if non-nil, tells M-x mail to insert your | |
5663 | `.signature' file automatically. If you don't want your signature in | |
5664 | a particular message, just delete it before you send the message. | |
5665 | ||
5666 | You can specify the text to insert at the beginning of each line when | |
5667 | you use C-c C-y to yank the message you are replying to. Set | |
5668 | `mail-yank-prefix' to the desired string. A value of `nil' (the | |
5669 | default) means to use indentation, as in Emacs 18. If you use just | |
5670 | C-u as the prefix argument to C-c C-y, then it does not insert | |
5671 | anything at the beginning of the lines, regardless of the value of | |
5672 | `mail-yank-prefix'. | |
5673 | ||
5674 | If you like, you can expand mail aliases as abbrevs, as soon as you | |
5675 | type them in. To enable this feature, execute the following: | |
5676 | ||
5677 | (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook 'mail-abbrevs-setup) | |
5678 | ||
5679 | This can go in your .emacs file. | |
5680 | ||
5681 | Word abbrevs don't expand unless you insert a word-separator character | |
5682 | afterward. Any mail aliases that you didn't expand at insertion time | |
5683 | are expanded subsequently when you send the message. | |
5684 | ||
5685 | *** Changes in Rmail. | |
5686 | ||
5687 | Rmail by default gets new mail only from the system inbox file, | |
5688 | not from `~/mbox'. | |
5689 | ||
5690 | In Rmail, you can retry sending a message that failed | |
5691 | by typing `M-m' on the failure message. | |
5692 | ||
5693 | By contrast, another new command M-x rmail-resend is used for | |
5694 | forwarding a message and marking it as "resent from" you | |
5695 | with header fields "Resent-From:" and "Resent-To:". | |
5696 | ||
5697 | `e' is now the command to edit a message. | |
5698 | To expunge, type `x'. We know this will surprise people | |
5699 | some of the time, but the surprise will not be disastrous--if | |
5700 | you type `e' meaning to expunge, just turn off editing with C-c C-c | |
5701 | and then type `x'. | |
5702 | ||
5703 | Another new Rmail command is `<', which moves to the first message. | |
5704 | This is for symmetry with `>'. | |
5705 | ||
5706 | Use the `b' command to bury the Rmail buffer and its summary buffer, | |
5707 | if any, removing both of them from display on the screen. | |
5708 | ||
5709 | The variable `rmail-output-file-alist' now controls the default | |
5710 | for the file to output a message to. | |
5711 | ||
5712 | In the Rmail summary buffer, all cursor motion commands select | |
5713 | the message you move to. It's really neat when you use | |
5714 | incremental search. | |
5715 | ||
5716 | You can now issue most Rmail commands from an Rmail summary buffer. | |
5717 | The commands do the same thing in that buffer that they do in the | |
5718 | Rmail buffer. They apply to the message that is selected in the Rmail | |
5719 | buffer, which is always the one described by the current summary | |
5720 | line. | |
5721 | ||
5722 | Conversely, motion and deletion commands in the Rmail buffer also | |
5723 | update the summary buffer. If you set the variable | |
5724 | `rmail-redisplay-summary' to a non-nil value, then they bring the | |
5725 | summary buffer (if one exists) back onto the screen. | |
5726 | ||
5727 | C-M-t is a new command to make a summary by topic. It uses regexp | |
5728 | matching against just the subjects of the messages to decide which | |
5729 | messages to show in the summary. | |
5730 | ||
5731 | You can easily convert an Rmail file to system mailbox format with the | |
5732 | command `unrmail'. This command reads two arguments, the name of | |
5733 | the Rmail file to convert, and the name of the new mailbox file. | |
5734 | (This command does not change the Rmail file itself.) | |
5735 | ||
5736 | Rmail now handles Content Length fields in messages. | |
5737 | ||
5738 | *** `mail-extract-address-components' unpacks mail addresses. | |
5739 | It takes an address as a string (the contents of the From field, for | |
5740 | example) and returns a list of the form (FULL-NAME | |
5741 | CANONICAL-ADDRESS). | |
5742 | ||
5743 | *** Changes in C mode and C-related commands. | |
5744 | ||
5745 | **** M-x c-up-conditional | |
5746 | ||
5747 | In C mode, `c-up-conditional' moves back to the containing | |
5748 | preprocessor conditional, setting the mark where point was | |
5749 | previously. | |
5750 | ||
5751 | A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative argument, | |
5752 | this command moves forward to the end of the containing preprocessor | |
5753 | conditional. When going backwards, `#elif' acts like `#else' followed | |
5754 | by `#if'. When going forwards, `#elif' is ignored. | |
5755 | ||
5756 | **** In C mode, M-a and M-e are now defined as | |
5757 | `c-beginning-of-statement' and `c-end-of-statement'. | |
5758 | ||
5759 | **** In C mode, M-x c-backslash-region is a new command to insert or | |
5760 | align `\' characters at the ends of the lines of the region, except | |
5761 | for the last such line. This is useful after writing or editing a C | |
5762 | macro definition. | |
5763 | ||
5764 | If a line already ends in `\', this command adjusts the amount of | |
5765 | whitespace before it. Otherwise, it inserts a new `\'. | |
5766 | ||
5767 | *** New features in info. | |
5768 | ||
5769 | When Info looks for an Info file, it searches the directories | |
5770 | in `Info-directory-list'. This makes it easy to install the Info files | |
5771 | that come with various packages. You can specify the path with | |
5772 | the environment variable INFOPATH. | |
5773 | ||
5774 | There are new commands in Info mode. | |
5775 | ||
5776 | `]' now moves forward a node, going up and down levels as needed. | |
5777 | `[' is similar but moves backward. These two commands try to traverse | |
5778 | the entire Info tree, node by node. They are the equivalent of reading | |
5779 | a printed manual sequentially. | |
5780 | ||
5781 | `<' moves to the top node of the current Info file. | |
5782 | `>' moves to the last node of the file. | |
5783 | ||
5784 | SPC scrolls through the current node; at the end, it advances to the | |
5785 | next node in depth-first order (like `]'). | |
5786 | ||
5787 | DEL scrolls backwards in the current node; at the end, it moves to the | |
5788 | previous node in depth-first order (like `['). | |
5789 | ||
5790 | After a menu select, the info `up' command now restores point in the | |
5791 | menu. The combination of this and the previous two changes means that | |
5792 | repeated SPC keystrokes do the right (depth-first traverse forward) thing. | |
5793 | ||
5794 | `i STRING RET' moves to the node associated with STRING in the index | |
5795 | or indices of this manual. If there is more than one match for | |
5796 | STRING, the `i' command finds the first match. | |
5797 | ||
5798 | `,' finds the next match for the string in the previous `i' command | |
5799 | ||
5800 | If you click the middle mouse button near a cross-reference, | |
5801 | menu item or node pointer while in Info, you will go to the node | |
5802 | which is referenced. | |
5803 | ||
5804 | *** Changes in M-x compile. | |
5805 | ||
5806 | You can repeat any previous compilation command conveniently using the | |
5807 | minibuffer history commands, while in the minibuffer entering the | |
5808 | compilation command. | |
5809 | ||
5810 | While a compilation is going on, the string `Compiling' appears in | |
5811 | the mode line. When this string disappears, that tells you the | |
5812 | compilation is finished. | |
5813 | ||
5814 | The buffer of compiler messages is in Compilation mode. This mode | |
5815 | provides the keys SPC and DEL to scroll by screenfuls, and M-n and M-p | |
5816 | to move to the next or previous error message. You can also use C-c | |
5817 | C-c on any error message to find the corresponding source code. | |
5818 | ||
5819 | Emacs 19 has a more general parser for compiler messages. For example, it | |
5820 | can understand messages from lint, and from certain C compilers whose error | |
5821 | message format is unusual. Also, it only parses until it sees the error | |
5822 | message you want; you never have to wait a long time to see the first | |
5823 | error, no matter how big the buffer is. | |
5824 | ||
5825 | *** M-x diff and M-x diff-backup. | |
5826 | ||
5827 | This new command compares two files, displaying the differences in an | |
5828 | Emacs buffer. The options for the `diff' program come from the | |
5829 | variable `diff-switches', whose value should be a string. | |
5830 | ||
5831 | The buffer of differences has Compilation mode as its major mode, so you | |
5832 | can use C-x ` to visit successive changed locations in the two | |
5833 | source files, or you can move to a particular hunk of changes and type | |
5834 | C-c C-c to move to the corresponding source. You can also use the | |
5835 | other special commands of Compilation mode: SPC and DEL for | |
5836 | scrolling, and M-n and M-p for cursor motion. | |
5837 | ||
5838 | M-x diff-backup compares a file with its most recent backup. | |
5839 | If you specify the name of a backup file, `diff-backup' compares it | |
5840 | with the source file that it is a backup of. | |
5841 | ||
5842 | *** The View commands (such as M-x view-buffer and M-x view-file) no | |
5843 | longer use recursive edits; instead, they switch temporarily to a | |
5844 | different major mode (View mode) specifically designed for moving | |
5845 | around through a buffer without editing it. | |
5846 | ||
5847 | *** Changes in incremental search. | |
5848 | ||
5849 | **** The character to terminate an incremental search is now RET. | |
5850 | This is for compatibility with the way most other arguments are read. | |
5851 | ||
5852 | To search for a newline in an incremental search, type LFD (also known | |
5853 | as C-j). | |
5854 | ||
5855 | **** Incremental search now maintains a ring of previous search | |
5856 | strings. Use M-p and M-n to move through the ring to pick a search | |
5857 | string to reuse. These commands leave the selected search ring | |
5858 | element in the minibuffer, where you can edit it. Type C-s or C-r to | |
5859 | finish editing and search for the chosen string. | |
5860 | ||
5861 | **** If you type an upper case letter in incremental search, that turns | |
5862 | off case-folding, so that you get a case-sensitive search. | |
5863 | ||
5864 | **** If you type a space during regexp incremental search, it matches | |
5865 | any sequence of whitespace characters. If you want to match just a space, | |
5866 | type C-q SPC. | |
5867 | ||
5868 | **** Incremental search is now implemented as a major mode. When you | |
5869 | type C-s, it switches temporarily to a different keymap which defines | |
5870 | each key to do what it ought to do for incremental search. This has | |
5871 | next to no effect on the user-visible behavior of searching, but makes | |
5872 | it easier to customize that behavior. | |
5873 | ||
5874 | Emacs 19 eliminates the old variables `search-...-char' that used to | |
5875 | be the way to specify the characters to use for various special | |
5876 | purposes in incremental search. Instead, you can define the meaning | |
5877 | of a character in incremental search by modifying `isearch-mode-map'. | |
5878 | ||
5879 | *** New commands in Buffer Menu mode. | |
5880 | ||
5881 | The command C-o now displays the current line's buffer in another | |
5882 | window but does not select it. This is like the existing command `o' | |
5883 | which selects the current line's buffer in another window. | |
5884 | ||
5885 | The command % toggles the read-only flag of the current line's buffer. | |
5886 | ||
5887 | The way to switch to a set of several buffers, including those marked | |
5888 | with m, is now v. The q command simply quits, replacing the buffer | |
5889 | menu buffer with the buffer that was displayed previously. | |
5890 | ||
5891 | ** New major modes and packages. | |
5892 | ||
5893 | *** The news reader GNUS is now installed. | |
5894 | ||
5895 | *** There is a new interface for version control systems, called VC. | |
5896 | It works with both RCS and SCCS; in fact, you don't really have to | |
5897 | know which one of them is being used, because it automatically deals | |
5898 | with either one. | |
5899 | ||
5900 | Most of the time, the only command you have to know about is C-x C-q. | |
5901 | This command normally toggles the read-only flag of the current | |
5902 | buffer. If the buffer is visiting a file that is maintained with a | |
5903 | version control system, the command still toggles read-only, but does | |
5904 | so by checking the file in or checking it out. | |
5905 | ||
5906 | When you check a file in, VC asks you for a log entry by popping up a | |
5907 | buffer. Edit the entry there, then type C-c C-c when it is ready. | |
5908 | That's when the actual checkin happens. If you change your mind about | |
5909 | the checkin, simply switch buffers and don't ever go back to the log | |
5910 | buffer. | |
5911 | ||
5912 | To start using version control for a file, use the command C-x v v. | |
5913 | This works like C-x C-q (performing the next logical version-control | |
5914 | operation needed to change the file's writability) but it will also | |
5915 | perform initial checkin on an unregistered file. | |
5916 | ||
5917 | By default, VC uses RCS if RCS is installed on your machine; | |
5918 | otherwise, SCCS. If you want to make the choice explicitly, you can do | |
5919 | it by setting `vc-default-back-end' to the symbol `RCS' or the symbol | |
5920 | `SCCS'. | |
5921 | ||
5922 | You can tell when a file you visit is maintained with version control | |
5923 | because either `RCS' or `SCCS' appears in the mode line. | |
5924 | ||
5925 | *** A new Calendar mode has been added, the work of Edward M. Reingold. | |
5926 | The mode can display the Gregorian calendar and a variety of other | |
5927 | calendars at any date, and interacts with a diary facility similar to | |
5928 | the UNIX `calendar' utility. | |
5929 | ||
5930 | *** There is a new major mode for editing binary files: Hexl mode. | |
5931 | To use it, use M-x hexl-find-file instead of C-x C-f to visit the file. | |
5932 | This command converts the file's contents to hexadecimal and lets you | |
177c0ea7 | 5933 | edit the translation. When you save the file, it is converted |
a933dad1 DL |
5934 | automatically back to binary. |
5935 | ||
5936 | You can also use M-x hexl-mode to translate an existing buffer into hex. | |
177c0ea7 | 5937 | Do this if you have already visited a binary file. |
a933dad1 DL |
5938 | |
5939 | Hexl mode has a few other commands: | |
5940 | ||
5941 | C-M-d insert a byte with a code typed in decimal. | |
5942 | C-M-o insert a byte with a code typed in octal. | |
5943 | C-M-x insert a byte with a code typed in hex. | |
5944 | ||
5945 | C-x [ move to the beginning of a 1k-byte "page". | |
5946 | C-x ] move to the end of a 1k-byte "page". | |
5947 | ||
5948 | M-g go to an address specified in hex. | |
5949 | M-j go to an address specified in decimal. | |
5950 | ||
5951 | C-c C-c leave hexl mode and go back to the previous major mode. | |
5952 | ||
5953 | *** Miscellaneous new major modes include Awk mode, Icon mode, Makefile | |
5954 | mode, Perl mode and SGML mode. | |
5955 | ||
5956 | *** Edebug, a new source-level debugger for Emacs Lisp functions. | |
5957 | ||
5958 | To use Edebug, use the command M-x edebug-defun to "evaluate" a | |
5959 | function definition in an Emacs Lisp file. We put "evaluate" in | |
5960 | quotation marks because it doesn't just evaluate the function, it also | |
5961 | inserts additional information to support source-level debugging. | |
5962 | ||
5963 | You must also do | |
5964 | ||
5965 | (setq debugger 'edebug-debug) | |
5966 | ||
5967 | to cause errors and single-stepping to use Edebug instead of the usual | |
5968 | Emacs Lisp debugger. | |
5969 | ||
5970 | For more information, see the Edebug manual, which should be included | |
5971 | in the Emacs distribution. | |
5972 | ||
5973 | *** C++ mode is like C mode, except that it understands C++ comment syntax | |
5974 | and certain other differences between C and C++. It also has a command | |
5975 | `fill-c++-comment' which fills a paragraph made of comment lines. | |
5976 | ||
5977 | The command `comment-region' is useful in C++ mode for commenting out | |
5978 | several consecutive lines, or removing the commenting out of such lines. | |
5979 | ||
5980 | *** A new package for merging two variants of the same text. | |
5981 | ||
5982 | It's not unusual for programmers to get their signals crossed and | |
5983 | modify the same program in two different directions. Then somebody | |
5984 | has to merge the two versions. The command `emerge-files' makes this | |
5985 | easier. | |
5986 | ||
5987 | `emerge-files' reads two file names and compares them. Then it | |
5988 | displays three buffers: one for each file, and one for the | |
5989 | differences. | |
5990 | ||
5991 | If the original version of the file is available, you can make things | |
5992 | even easier using `emerge-files-with-ancestor'. It reads three file | |
5993 | names--variant 1, variant 2, and the common ancestor--and uses diff3 | |
5994 | to compare them. | |
5995 | ||
5996 | You control the merging interactively. The main loop of Emerge | |
5997 | consists of showing you one set of differences, asking you what to do | |
5998 | about them, and doing it. You have a choice of two modes for giving | |
5999 | directions to Emerge: "fast" mode and "edit" mode. | |
6000 | ||
6001 | In Fast mode, Emerge commands are single characters, and ordinary | |
6002 | Emacs commands are disabled. This makes Emerge operations fast, but | |
6003 | prevents you from doing more than selecting the A or the B version of | |
6004 | differences. In Edit mode, all emerge commands use the C-c prefix, | |
6005 | and the usual Emacs commands are available. This allows editing the | |
6006 | merge buffer, but slows down Emerge operations. Edit and fast modes | |
6007 | are indicated by `F' and `E' in the minor modes in the mode line. | |
6008 | ||
6009 | The Emerge commands are: | |
6010 | ||
6011 | p go to the previous difference | |
6012 | n go to the next difference | |
6013 | a select the A version of this difference | |
6014 | b select the B version of this difference | |
6015 | j go to a particular difference (prefix argument | |
6016 | specifies which difference) (0j suppresses display of | |
6017 | the flags) | |
6018 | q quit - finish the merge* | |
6019 | f go into fast mode | |
6020 | e go into edit mode | |
6021 | l recenter (C-l) all three windows* | |
6022 | - and 0 through 9 | |
6023 | prefix numeric arguments | |
6024 | d a select the A version as the default from here down in | |
6025 | the merge buffer* | |
6026 | d b select the B version as the default from here down in | |
6027 | the merge buffer* | |
6028 | c a copy the A version of the difference into the kill | |
6029 | ring | |
6030 | c b copy the B version of the difference into the kill | |
6031 | ring | |
6032 | i a insert the A version of the difference at the point | |
6033 | i b insert the B version of the difference at the point | |
6034 | m put the point and mark around the difference region | |
6035 | ^ scroll-down (like M-v) the three windows* | |
6036 | v scroll-up (like C-v) the three windows* | |
6037 | < scroll-left (like C-x <) the three windows* | |
6038 | > scroll-right (like C-x >) the three windows* | |
6039 | | reset horizontal scroll on the three windows* | |
6040 | x 1 shrink the merge window to one line (use C-u l to restore it | |
6041 | to full size) | |
6042 | x a find the difference containing a location in the A buffer* | |
6043 | x b find the difference containing a location in the B buffer* | |
6044 | x c combine the two versions of this difference* | |
6045 | x C combine the two versions of this difference, using a | |
6046 | register's value as the template* | |
6047 | x d find the difference containing a location in the merge buffer* | |
6048 | x f show the files/buffers Emerge is operating on in Help window | |
6049 | (use C-u l to restore windows) | |
6050 | x j join this difference with the following one | |
6051 | (C-u x j joins this difference with the previous one) | |
6052 | x l show line numbers of points in A, B, and merge buffers | |
6053 | x m change major mode of merge buffer* | |
6054 | x s split this difference into two differences | |
6055 | (first position the point in all three buffers to the places | |
6056 | to split the difference) | |
6057 | x t trim identical lines off top and bottom of difference | |
6058 | (such lines occur when the A and B versions are | |
6059 | identical but differ from the ancestor version) | |
6060 | x x set the template for the x c command* | |
6061 | ||
6062 | Normally, the merged output goes back in the first file specified. | |
6063 | If you use a prefix argument, Emerge reads another file name to use | |
6064 | for the output file. | |
6065 | ||
6066 | Once Emerge has prepared the buffer of differences, it runs the hooks | |
6067 | in `emerge-startup-hooks'. | |
6068 | ||
6069 | *** Asm mode is a new major mode for editing files of assembler code. | |
6070 | It defines these commands: | |
6071 | ||
6072 | TAB tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6073 | LFD Insert a newline and then indent using tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6074 | : Insert a colon and then remove the indentation | |
6075 | from before the label preceding colon. Then tab-to-tab-stop. | |
6076 | ; Insert or align a comment. | |
6077 | ||
6078 | *** Two-column mode lets you conveniently edit two side-by-side columns | |
6079 | of text. It works using two side-by-side windows, each showing its | |
6080 | own buffer. | |
6081 | ||
6082 | Here are three ways to enter two-column mode: | |
6083 | ||
6084 | C-x 6 2 makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer. In the | |
6085 | right-hand window it puts a buffer whose name is based on the current | |
6086 | buffer's name. | |
6087 | ||
6088 | C-x 6 b BUFFER RET makes the current buffer into the left-hand buffer, | |
6089 | and uses buffer BUFFER as the right-hand buffer. | |
6090 | ||
6091 | C-x 6 s splits the current buffer, which contains two-column text, | |
6092 | into two side-by-side buffers. The old current buffer becomes the | |
6093 | left-hand buffer, but the text in the right column is moved into the | |
6094 | right-hand buffer. The current column specifies the split point. | |
6095 | Splitting starts with the current line and continues to the end of the | |
6096 | buffer. | |
6097 | ||
6098 | C-x 6 s takes a prefix argument which specifies how many characters | |
6099 | before point constitute the column separator. (The default argument | |
6100 | is 1, as usual, so by default the column separator is the character | |
6101 | before point.) Lines that don't have the column separator at the | |
6102 | proper place remain unsplit; they stay in the left-hand buffer, and | |
6103 | the right-hand buffer gets an empty line to correspond. | |
6104 | ||
6105 | You can scroll both buffers together using C-x 6 SPC (scroll up), C-x | |
6106 | 6 DEL (scroll down), and C-x 6 RET (scroll up one line). C-x 6 C-l | |
6107 | recenters both buffers together. | |
6108 | ||
6109 | If you want to make a line which will span both columns, put it in | |
6110 | the left-hand buffer, with an empty line in the corresponding place in | |
6111 | the right-hand buffer. | |
6112 | ||
6113 | When you have edited both buffers as you wish, merge them with C-x 6 | |
6114 | 1. This copies the text from the right-hand buffer as a second column | |
6115 | in the other buffer. To go back to two-column editing, use C-x 6 s. | |
6116 | ||
6117 | Use C-x 6 d to disassociate the two buffers, leaving each as it | |
6118 | stands. (If the other buffer, the one that was not current when you | |
6119 | type C-x 6 d, is empty, C-x 6 d kills it.) | |
6120 | ||
6121 | *** You can supply command arguments such as files to visit to an Emacs | |
6122 | that is already running. To do this, you must do this in your .emacs | |
6123 | file: | |
6124 | (add-hook 'suspend-hook 'resume-suspend-hook) | |
6125 | Also you must use the shellscript emacs.csh or emacs.sh, found in the | |
6126 | etc subdirectory. | |
6127 | ||
6128 | *** Shell mode has been completely replaced. | |
6129 | The basic idea is the same, but there are new commands available in | |
6130 | this mode. | |
177c0ea7 | 6131 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6132 | TAB now completes the file name before point in the shell buffer. |
6133 | To get a list of all possible completions, type M-?. | |
6134 | ||
6135 | There is a new convenient history mechanism for repeating previous | |
6136 | commands. Use the command M-p to recall the last command; it copies | |
6137 | the text of that command to the place where you are editing. If you | |
6138 | repeat M-p, it replaces the copied command with the previous command. | |
6139 | M-n is similar but goes in the opposite direction towards the present. | |
6140 | When you find the command you wanted, you can edit it, or just | |
6141 | resubmit it by typing RET. | |
6142 | ||
177c0ea7 JB |
6143 | You can also use M-r and M-s to search for (respectively) earlier or |
6144 | later inputs starting with a given string. First type the string, | |
a933dad1 DL |
6145 | then type M-r to yank a previous input from the history which starts |
6146 | with that string. You can repeat M-r to find successively earlier | |
6147 | inputs starting with the same string. You can start moving in the | |
6148 | opposite direction (toward more recent inputs) by typing M-s instead | |
6149 | of M-r. As long as you don't use any commands except M-r and M-s, | |
6150 | they keep using the same string that you had entered initially. | |
6151 | ||
6152 | C-c C-o kills the last batch of output from a shell command. This is | |
6153 | useful if a shell command spews out lots of output that just gets in | |
6154 | the way. | |
6155 | ||
6156 | C-c C-r scrolls to display the beginning of the last batch of output | |
6157 | at the top of the window; it also moves the cursor there. | |
6158 | ||
6159 | C-a on a line that starts with a shell prompt moves to the end of the | |
6160 | prompt, not to the very beginning of the line. | |
6161 | ||
6162 | C-d typed at the end of the shell buffer sends EOF to the subshell. | |
6163 | At any other position in the buffer, it deletes a character as usual. | |
6164 | ||
6165 | If Emacs gets confused while trying to track changes in the shell's | |
6166 | current directory, type M-x dirs to re-synchronize. | |
6167 | ||
6168 | M-x send-invisible reads a line of text without echoing it, and | |
6169 | sends it to the shell. | |
6170 | ||
177c0ea7 | 6171 | If you accidentally suspend your process, use M-x comint-continue-subjob |
a933dad1 | 6172 | to continue it. |
177c0ea7 | 6173 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6174 | *** There is now a convenient way to enable flow control on terminals |
6175 | where you can't win without it. Suppose you want to do this on | |
6176 | VT-100 and H19 terminals; put the following in your `.emacs' file: | |
6177 | ||
6178 | (enable-flow-control-on "vt100" "h19") | |
6179 | ||
6180 | When flow control is enabled, you must type C-\ to get the effect of a | |
6181 | C-s, and type C-^ to get the effect of a C-q. | |
6182 | ||
6183 | The function `enable-flow-control' enables flow control unconditionally. | |
6184 | \f | |
6185 | ** Changes in Dired | |
6186 | ||
6187 | Dired has many new features which allow you to do these things: | |
6188 | ||
6189 | - Rename, copy, or make links to many files at once. | |
6190 | ||
6191 | - Make distinguishable types of marks for different operations. | |
6192 | ||
6193 | - Display contents of subdirectories in the same Dired buffer as the | |
6194 | parent directory. | |
6195 | ||
6196 | *** Setting and Clearing Marks | |
6197 | ||
6198 | There are now two kinds of marker that you can put on a file in Dired: | |
6199 | `D' for deletion, and `*' for any other kind of operation. | |
6200 | The `x' command deletes only files marked with `D', and most | |
6201 | other Dired commands operate only on the files marked with `*'. | |
6202 | ||
6203 | To mark files with `D' (also called "flagging" the files), you | |
6204 | can use `d' as usual. Here are some commands for marking with | |
6205 | `*' (and also for unmarking): | |
6206 | ||
6207 | **** `m' marks the current file with `*', for an operation other than | |
6208 | deletion. | |
6209 | ||
6210 | **** `*' marks all executable files. With a prefix argument, it | |
6211 | unmarks all those files. | |
6212 | ||
6213 | **** `@' marks all symbolic links. With a prefix argument, it unmarks | |
6214 | all those files. | |
6215 | ||
6216 | **** `/' marks all directory files except `.' and `..'. With a prefix | |
6217 | argument, it unmarks all those files. | |
6218 | ||
6219 | **** M-DEL removes a specific or all marks from every file. With an | |
6220 | argument, queries for each marked file. Type your help character, | |
6221 | usually C-h, at that time for help. | |
6222 | ||
6223 | **** `c' replaces all marks that use the character OLD with marks that | |
6224 | use the character NEW. You can use almost any character as a mark | |
6225 | character by means of this command, to distinguish various classes of | |
6226 | files. If OLD is ` ', then the command operates on all unmarked | |
6227 | files; if NEW is ` ', then the command unmarks the files it acts on. | |
6228 | ||
6229 | *** Operating on Multiple Files | |
6230 | ||
6231 | The Dired commands to operate directly on files (rename them, copy | |
6232 | them, and so on) have been generalized to work on multiple files. | |
6233 | There are also some additional commands in this series. | |
6234 | ||
6235 | All of these commands use the same convention to decide which files to | |
6236 | manipulate: | |
6237 | ||
6238 | - If you give the command a numeric prefix argument @var{n}, it operates | |
6239 | on the next @var{n} files, starting with the current file. | |
6240 | ||
6241 | - Otherwise, if there are marked files, the commands operate on all the | |
6242 | marked files. | |
6243 | ||
6244 | - Otherwise, the command operates on the current file only. | |
6245 | ||
6246 | These are the commands: | |
6247 | ||
6248 | **** `C' copies the specified files. You must specify a directory to | |
6249 | copy into, or (if copying a single file) a new name. | |
6250 | ||
6251 | If `dired-copy-preserve-time' is non-`nil', then copying sets | |
6252 | the modification time of the new file to be the same as that of the old | |
6253 | file. | |
6254 | ||
6255 | **** `R' renames the specified files. You must specify a directory to | |
6256 | rename into, or (if renaming a single file) a new name. | |
6257 | ||
6258 | Dired automatically changes the visited file name of buffers associated | |
6259 | with renamed files so that they refer to the new names. | |
6260 | ||
6261 | **** `H' makes hard links to the specified files. You must specify a | |
6262 | directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the name | |
6263 | to give the link. | |
6264 | ||
6265 | **** `S' makes symbolic links to the specified files. You must specify | |
6266 | a directory to make the links in, or (if making just one link) the | |
6267 | name to give the link. | |
6268 | ||
6269 | **** `M' changes the mode of the specified files. This calls the | |
6270 | `chmod' program, so you can describe the desired mode change with any | |
6271 | argument that `chmod' would handle. | |
6272 | ||
6273 | **** `G' changes the group of the specified files. | |
6274 | ||
6275 | **** `O' changes the owner of the specified files. (On normal systems, | |
6276 | only the superuser can do this.) | |
6277 | ||
6278 | The variable `dired-chown-program' specifies the name of the | |
6279 | program to use to do the work (different systems put `chown' in | |
6280 | different places. | |
6281 | ||
6282 | **** `Z' compresses or uncompresses the specified files. | |
6283 | ||
6284 | **** `L' loads the specified Emacs Lisp files. | |
6285 | ||
6286 | **** `B' byte compiles the specified Emacs Lisp files. | |
6287 | ||
6288 | **** `P' prints the specified files. It uses the variables | |
6289 | `lpr-command' and `lpr-switches' just as `lpr-file' does. | |
6290 | ||
6291 | *** Shell Commands in Dired | |
6292 | ||
6293 | `!' reads a shell command string in the minibuffer and runs the shell | |
6294 | command on all the specified files. There are two ways of applying a | |
6295 | shell command to multiple files: | |
6296 | ||
6297 | - If you use `*' in the command, then the shell command runs just | |
6298 | once, with the list of file names substituted for the `*'. | |
6299 | ||
6300 | Thus, `! tar cf foo.tar * RET' runs `tar' on the entire list of file | |
6301 | names, putting them into one tar file `foo.tar'. The file names are | |
6302 | inserted in the order that they appear in the Dired buffer. | |
6303 | ||
6304 | - If the command string doesn't contain `*', then it runs once for | |
6305 | each file, with the file name attached at the end. For example, `! | |
6306 | uudecode RET' runs `uudecode' on each file. | |
6307 | ||
6308 | To run the shell command once for each file but without being limited | |
6309 | to putting the file name inserted in the middle, use a shell loop. | |
6310 | For example, this shell command would run `uuencode' on each of the | |
6311 | specified files, writing the output into a corresponding `.uu' file: | |
6312 | ||
6313 | for file in *; uuencode $file $file >$file.uu; done | |
6314 | ||
6315 | The working directory for the shell command is the top level directory | |
6316 | of the Dired buffer. | |
6317 | ||
6318 | *** Regular Expression File Name Substitution | |
6319 | ||
6320 | **** `% m REGEXP RET' marks all files whose names match the regular | |
6321 | expression REGEXP. | |
6322 | ||
6323 | Only the non-directory part of the file name is used in matching. Use | |
6324 | `^' and `$' to anchor matches. Exclude subdirs by hiding them. | |
6325 | ||
6326 | **** `% d REGEXP RET' flags for deletion all files whose names match | |
6327 | the regular expression REGEXP. | |
6328 | ||
6329 | **** `% R', `% C', `% H', `% S' | |
6330 | ||
6331 | These four commands rename, copy, make hard links and make soft links, | |
6332 | in each case computing the new name by regular expression substitution | |
6333 | from the name of the old file. They effectively perform | |
6334 | `query-replace-regexp' on the selected file names in the Dired buffer. | |
6335 | ||
6336 | The commands read two arguments: a regular expression, and a | |
6337 | substitution pattern. Each selected file name is matched against the | |
6338 | regular expression, and then the part which matched is replaced with | |
6339 | the substitution pattern. You can use `\&' and `\DIGIT' in the | |
6340 | substitution pattern to refer to all or part of the old file name. | |
6341 | ||
6342 | If the regular expression matches more than once in a file name, | |
6343 | only the first match is replaced. | |
6344 | ||
6345 | Normally, the replacement process does not consider the directory names; | |
6346 | it operates on the file name within the directory. If you specify a | |
6347 | prefix argument of zero, then replacement affects entire file name. | |
6348 | ||
6349 | To apply the command to all files matching the same regexp that you | |
6350 | use in the command, mark those files with `% m REGEXP RET', then use | |
6351 | the same regular expression in `% R'. To make this easier, `% R' uses | |
6352 | as a default the last regular expression specified in a `%' command. | |
6353 | ||
6354 | *** Dired Case Conversion | |
6355 | ||
6356 | **** `% u' renames each of the selected files to an upper case name. | |
6357 | ||
6358 | **** `% l' renames each of the selected files to a lower case name. | |
6359 | ||
6360 | *** File Comparison with Dired | |
6361 | ||
6362 | **** `=' compares the current file with another file (the file at the | |
6363 | mark), by running the `diff' program. The file at the mark is given | |
6364 | to `diff' first. | |
6365 | ||
6366 | **** `M-=' compares the current file with its backup file. If there | |
6367 | are several numerical backups, it uses the most recent one. If this | |
6368 | file is a backup, it is compared with its original. | |
6369 | ||
6370 | The backup file is the first file given to `diff'. | |
6371 | ||
6372 | *** Subdirectories in Dired | |
6373 | ||
6374 | You can display more than one directory in one Dired buffer. | |
6375 | The simplest way to do this is to specify the options `-lR' for | |
6376 | running `ls'. That produces a recursive directory listing showing | |
6377 | all subdirectories, all within the same Dired buffer. | |
6378 | ||
6379 | You can also insert the contents of a particular subdirectory with the | |
6380 | `i' command. Use this command on the line that describes a file which | |
6381 | is a directory. Inserted subdirectory contents follow the top-level | |
6382 | directory of the Dired buffer, just as they do in `ls -lR' output. | |
6383 | ||
6384 | If the subdirectory's contents are already present in the buffer, the | |
6385 | `i' command just moves to it (type `l' to refresh it). It sets the | |
6386 | Emacs mark before moving, so C-x C-x takes you back to the old | |
6387 | position in the buffer. | |
6388 | ||
6389 | When you have subdirectories in the Dired buffer, you can use the page | |
6390 | motion commands C-x [ and C-x ] to move by entire directories. | |
6391 | ||
6392 | The following commands move up and down in the tree of directories | |
6393 | in one Dired buffer: | |
6394 | ||
6395 | **** C-M-u Go up to the parent directory's headerline. | |
6396 | ||
6397 | **** C-M-d Go down in the tree, to the first subdirectory's | |
6398 | headerline. | |
6399 | ||
6400 | **** C-M-n Go to next subdirectory headerline, regardless of level. | |
6401 | ||
6402 | **** C-M-p Go to previous subdirectory headerline, regardless of | |
6403 | level. | |
6404 | ||
6405 | *** Hiding Subdirectories | |
6406 | ||
6407 | "Hiding" a subdirectory means to make it invisible, except for its | |
6408 | headerline. Files inside a hidden subdirectory are never considered | |
6409 | by Dired. For example, the commands to operate on marked files ignore | |
6410 | files in hidden directories even if they are marked. | |
6411 | ||
6412 | **** `$' hides or unhides the current subdirectory and move to next | |
6413 | subdirectory. A prefix argument serves as a repeat count. | |
6414 | ||
6415 | **** `M-$' hides all subdirectories, leaving only their header lines. | |
6416 | Or, if at least one subdirectory is currently hidden, it makes | |
6417 | everything visible again. You can use this command to get an overview | |
6418 | in very deep directory trees or to move quickly to subdirectories far | |
6419 | away. | |
6420 | ||
6421 | *** Editing the Dired Buffer | |
6422 | ||
6423 | **** `l' updates the specified files in a Dired buffer. This means | |
6424 | reading their current status from the file system and changing the | |
6425 | buffer to reflect it properly. | |
6426 | ||
6427 | If you use this command on a subdirectory header line, it updates the | |
6428 | contents of the subdirectory. | |
6429 | ||
6430 | **** `g' updates the entire contents of the Dired buffer. It preserves | |
6431 | all marks except for those on files that have vanished. Hidden | |
6432 | subdirectories are updated but remain hidden. | |
6433 | ||
6434 | **** `k' kills all marked lines (not the files). With a prefix | |
6435 | argument, it kills that many lines starting with the current line. | |
6436 | ||
6437 | This command does not delete files; it just deletes text from the Dired | |
6438 | buffer. | |
6439 | ||
6440 | If you kill the line for a file that is a directory, then its contents | |
6441 | are also deleted from the buffer. Typing `C-u k' on the header line | |
6442 | for a subdirectory is another way to delete a subdirectory from the | |
6443 | Dired buffer. | |
6444 | ||
6445 | *** `find' and Dired. | |
6446 | ||
6447 | To search for files with names matching a wildcard pattern use | |
6448 | `find-name-dired'. Its arguments are DIRECTORY and | |
6449 | PATTERN. It selects all the files in DIRECTORY or its | |
6450 | subdirectories whose own names match PATTERN. | |
6451 | ||
6452 | The files thus selected are displayed in a Dired buffer in which the | |
6453 | ordinary Dired commands are available. | |
6454 | ||
6455 | If you want to test the contents of files, rather than their names, use | |
6456 | `find-grep-dired'. This command takes two minibuffer arguments, | |
6457 | DIRECTORY and REGEXP; it selects all the files in | |
6458 | DIRECTORY or its subdirectories that contain a match for | |
6459 | REGEXP. It works by running `find' and `grep'. | |
6460 | ||
6461 | The most general command in this series is `find-dired', which lets | |
6462 | you specify any condition that `find' can test. It takes two | |
6463 | minibuffer arguments, DIRECTORY and FIND-ARGS; it runs `find' in | |
6464 | DIRECTORY with using FIND-ARGS as the arguments to `find' specifying | |
6465 | which files to accept. To use this command, you need to know how to | |
6466 | use `find'. | |
6467 | \f | |
6468 | ** New amusements and novelties. | |
6469 | ||
6470 | *** `M-x mpuz' displays a multiplication puzzle, in which each letter | |
6471 | stands for a digit, and you must determine which digit. The puzzles | |
6472 | are determined randomly, so they are always different. | |
6473 | ||
6474 | *** `M-x gomoku' plays the game Gomoku with you. It needs more work. | |
6475 | ||
6476 | *** `M-x spook' adds a line of randomly chosen keywords to an outgoing | |
6477 | mail message. The keywords are chosen from a list of words that | |
6478 | suggest you are discussing something subversive. | |
6479 | ||
6480 | The idea is that the NSA reads all messages that contain keywords | |
6481 | suggesting they might be interested, and that adding these lines could | |
6482 | help to overload them. I would guess that they have modified their | |
6483 | program by now to ignore these lines of keywords; perhaps the program | |
6484 | can be updated if some clever hacker can determine what criterion they | |
6485 | actually use now. | |
6486 | \f | |
6487 | ** Installation changes | |
6488 | ||
6489 | *** The configure script has been provided to help with the | |
6490 | installation process. It takes the place of editing the Makefiles and | |
6491 | src/config.h, and can often guess the appropriate operating system to | |
6492 | use for a particular machine type. See INSTALL for a more detailed | |
6493 | description of the steps required for installation. | |
6494 | ||
6495 | *** If you create a Lisp file named `site-start.el', Emacs loads the file | |
6496 | whenever it starts up. | |
6497 | ||
6498 | *** A new Lisp variable, `data-directory', indicates the directory | |
6499 | containing the DOC file, tutorial, copying agreement, and other | |
6500 | familiar `etc' files. The value of `data-directory' is a simple string. | |
6501 | The default should be set at build time, and the person installing | |
6502 | Emacs should place all the data files in this directory. The `help.el' | |
6503 | functions that look for docstrings and information files check this | |
6504 | variable. All Emacs Lisp packages should also be coded so that they | |
6505 | refer to `data-directory' to find data files. | |
6506 | ||
6507 | *** The PURESIZE definition has been moved from config.h to its own | |
6508 | file, puresize.h. Since almost every file of C source in the | |
6509 | distribution depends on config.h, but only alloc.c and data.c depend | |
6510 | on puresize.h, this means that changing the value of PURESIZE causes | |
6511 | only those two files to be recompiled. | |
6512 | ||
6513 | *** The makefile at the top of the Emacs source tree now supports a | |
6514 | `dist' target, which creates a compressed tar file suitable for | |
6515 | distribution, using the contents of the source tree. Object files, | |
6516 | old file versions, executables, DOC files, and other | |
6517 | architecture-specific or easy-to-recreate files are not included in | |
6518 | the tar file. | |
a933dad1 | 6519 | |
9a21d88b KS |
6520 | |
6521 | \f | |
a933dad1 | 6522 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
5b87ad55 | 6523 | This file is part of GNU Emacs. |
a933dad1 | 6524 | |
ab73e885 | 6525 | GNU Emacs is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify |
5b87ad55 | 6526 | it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by |
ab73e885 GM |
6527 | the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or |
6528 | (at your option) any later version. | |
5b87ad55 GM |
6529 | |
6530 | GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
6531 | but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
6532 | MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
6533 | GNU General Public License for more details. | |
a933dad1 | 6534 | |
5b87ad55 | 6535 | You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
ab73e885 | 6536 | along with GNU Emacs. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. |
a933dad1 | 6537 | |
a933dad1 DL |
6538 | \f |
6539 | Local variables: | |
6540 | mode: outline | |
6541 | paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$" | |
6542 | end: |